List Film

MAC (Midlands Arts Centre)

Add to favourites
Cannon Hill Park, Birmingham, England, B12 9QH
Photo of MAC (Midlands Arts Centre)
Whilst every effort has been made to ensure the information displayed here is accurate, always check with the venue before attending (especially during the Covid-19 pandemic).

2Faced Dance Company: EVERYTHING (but the girl)

EVERYTHING [but the girl] By 2Faced Dance Company 2Faced Dance Company make their highly-anticipated return to theatres this spring with their unforgettable triple-bill of emotionally charged, lung-busting physicality. Packed with raw energy and exceptional movement from one of the UK’s leading contemporary dance companies, EVERYTHING [but the girl] features three unique and visceral works: The Qualies by Fleur Darkin - A theatrical collaboration with the seminal US writer David Foster Wallace; bringing his ground-breaking study of the American tennis player Michael Joyce to life as a dance for four men. Created by the celebrated choreographer Fleur Darkin. Hollow in a World Too Full by Tamsin Fitzgerald – “We sit in a house and slowly the world we are living in is getting smaller” – Network 1976. A world first for the company, this solo work follows one man’s journey through a world too full. Featuring an impressive score from Cannes award-winning composer Alex Baranowski. 7.0 Reduxed by Tamsin Fitzgerald – How do we respond when everything we thought we knew is taken away from under us with devastating consequences? A highly physical, heart-in-mouth piece, 7.0 has often been cited as one of the company’s most successful works to date. Age recommendation: 11+ “Five young men – talented, indefatigable, and entirely committed – make up 2Faced Dance and bring an explosive energy to EVERYTHING [but the girl].” – Culture Whisper “2Faced Dance Company ticks all the right boxes: high energy, total commitment and concepts of concern for these turbulent times.” - Seeing DancePRESS QUOTES “2Faced Dance Company ticks all the right boxes: high energy, total commitment and concepts of concern for these turbulent times.” - Seeing Dance “Five young men – talented, indefatigable, and entirely committed – make up 2Faced Dance and bring an explosive energy to the company’s anniversary triple bill, EVERYTHING [but the girl].” – Culture Whisper “7.0 – Reduxed gives a good idea of what Tamsin Fitzgerald’s company is all about.” – DanceTabs “The high-octane choreography sticks to Fitzgerald’s trademark combination of fast-moving contemporary dance, street breaking, and acrobatics.” – Culture Whisper “All three works showcase the physicality of the dancers and all benefit from James Mackenzie’s sensitive lighting.” – Seen and Heard

Fri 11 Mar
Theatre

£10–£22

Sat 12 Mar
Theatre

£10–£22

Acting and Performance (DA103 Spring)

Learn acting and performance skills and techniques whilst developing confidence. What will you learn on this course? The course will cover a wide range of acting and performance skills and techniques such as improvisation, devising, and script work by using a range of different practitioners such as Meisner, Artaud, Brecht, and Stanislavsky. The course will work toward a final showcase performance. Who is this course for? This course is for all adults aged 18+ years. It is open to all who would like to improve their confidence and develop their performance skills. No previous acting experience is necessary. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring water and wear loose comfortable clothes. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs Who teaches this course? Kirsty Mitchell

Wed 12 Jan
English Studio

£117 (£106)

Wed 19 Jan
English Studio

£117 (£106)

Wed 26 Jan
English Studio

£117 (£106)

Wed 2 Feb
English Studio

£117 (£106)

Wed 9 Feb
English Studio

£117 (£106)

Wed 16 Feb
English Studio

£117 (£106)

Wed 2 Mar
English Studio

£117 (£106)

Wed 9 Mar
English Studio

£117 (£106)

Wed 16 Mar
English Studio

£117 (£106)

Wed 23 Mar
English Studio

£117 (£106)

Wed 30 Mar
English Studio

£117 (£106)

Wed 6 Apr
English Studio

£117 (£106)

Acting and Performance (DA103 Summer)

Learn acting and performance skills and techniques whilst developing confidence. What will you learn on this course? The course will cover a wide range of acting and performance skills and techniques such as improvisation, devising, and script work by using a range of different practitioners such as Meisner, Artaud, Brecht, and Stanislavsky. The course will work toward a final showcase performance. Who is this course for? This course is for all adults aged 18+ years. It is open to all who would like to improve their confidence and develop their performance skills. No previous acting experience is necessary. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring water and wear loose comfortable clothes. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs Who teaches this course? Kirsty Mitchell

Wed 27 Apr
English Studio

£117 (£106)

Wed 4 May
English Studio

£117 (£106)

Wed 11 May
English Studio

£117 (£106)

Wed 18 May
English Studio

£117 (£106)

Wed 25 May
English Studio

£117 (£106)

Wed 8 Jun
English Studio

£117 (£106)

Wed 15 Jun
English Studio

£117 (£106)

Wed 22 Jun
English Studio

£117 (£106)

Wed 29 Jun
English Studio

£117 (£106)

Wed 6 Jul
English Studio

£117 (£106)

Wed 13 Jul
English Studio

£117 (£106)

Wed 20 Jul
English Studio

£117 (£106)

Animation (DM108 Spring)

This course is an introduction to the art of illustration and animation techniques. What will you learn on this course? Lead by a professional film maker, illustrator and animator you will learn how to create your own animations. You will gain an understanding of essential animation principles and be introduced to different stylistic approaches and artistic techniques. You will learn about every step of the animation process, including story writing, concept design, character design, animating, sound recording and editing. Using a combination of practical design demonstrations and 1-2-1 support you will receive guidance tailored to your individual projects and needs. On completion of this course you can expect to have gained an understanding of a range of approaches to animating and have produced your own animation. The course will cover • Drawing skills • Fundamental animation principles • Using animation and editing software • Stylistic choices • Story writing • Character design • Introduction to contemporary animations • Exploration of various animation types Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is for beginners and improvers who would like to develop their illustration and animation skills. The course is accessible for people with disabilities who are able to undertake practical arts and crafts activities and use a computer. A carer or support worker may assist learners on this course. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything as all materials and equipment is provided. You are welcome to bring your own pens, pencils, tablets, laptops and filming devices in consultation with the tutor. MAC can provide basic equipment and materials to participants attending most courses if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs for this course. Who teaches this course? Martin McNally

Fri 14 Jan
Media Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 21 Jan
Media Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 28 Jan
Media Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 4 Feb
Media Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 11 Feb
Media Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 18 Feb
Media Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 4 Mar
Media Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 11 Mar
Media Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 18 Mar
Media Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 25 Mar
Media Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 1 Apr
Media Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 8 Apr
Media Studio

£143 (£129)

Animation (DM108 Summer)

This course is an introduction to the art of illustration and animation techniques. What will you learn on this course? Lead by a professional film maker, illustrator and animator you will learn how to create your own animations. You will gain an understanding of essential animation principles and be introduced to different stylistic approaches and artistic techniques. You will learn about every step of the animation process, including story writing, concept design, character design, animating, sound recording and editing. Using a combination of practical design demonstrations and 1-2-1 support you will receive guidance tailored to your individual projects and needs. On completion of this course you can expect to have gained an understanding of a range of approaches to animating and have produced your own animation. The course will cover • Drawing skills • Fundamental animation principles • Using animation and editing software • Stylistic choices • Story writing • Character design • Introduction to contemporary animations • Exploration of various animation types Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is for beginners and improvers who would like to develop their illustration and animation skills. The course is accessible for people with disabilities who are able to undertake practical arts and crafts activities and use a computer. A carer or support worker may assist learners on this course. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything as all materials and equipment is provided. You are welcome to bring your own pens, pencils, tablets, laptops and filming devices in consultation with the tutor. MAC can provide basic equipment and materials to participants attending most courses if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs for this course. Who teaches this course? Martin McNally

Fri 29 Apr
Media Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 6 May
Media Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 13 May
Media Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 20 May
Media Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 27 May
Media Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 10 Jun
Media Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 17 Jun
Media Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 24 Jun
Media Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 1 Jul
Media Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 8 Jul
Media Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 15 Jul
Media Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 22 Jul
Media Studio

£143 (£129)

Art Appreciation (VA47 Spring)

If you’ve ever wanted to know the difference between Impressionism and Expressionism, Baroque and Rococo, Fauvism and Cubism or simply brush up on your knowledge, then this course is for you. An introduction to key periods in western art history for those who wish to gain an insight into important developments and discoveries in the world of art. You will also have the opportunity to produce some practical work that relates to relevant topics to gain a better understanding of techniques and concepts. During the course you will have special access to MAC’s Visual Arts Exhibitions programme, with curator talks and group visits to local galleries. What will you learn on this course? Using a mix of tutor led talks, group discussion and practical demonstrations the tutor will support you in your learning about key periods in western art history, it’s technical discoveries and contextual ideologies. You will develop your understanding and theoretical knowledge of key art movements.
You will have the opportunity to partake in some creative practical activities that relates to relevant topics. This may include short drawing, painting and collage exercises to enhance your understanding and you will be given one-to-one support as required. On completion of this course, you will have produced a detailed learning/visual journal containing notes, visual references and information with a selection of your own practical work. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. It is suitable for people who have little or no knowledge or art history that wish to learn through research and practical exercises. The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can participate in practical craft activities. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring a hardback, ringbound A4 sketchbook. Basic art materials will be provided but students will be expected to provide some of their own additional materials as the course progresses. There will also be access to free Wi-Fi so students are welcome to bring their own tablet or laptop devices for research. MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? Your sketchbook and any additional art materials are to be provided at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Angela Maloney MA

Wed 12 Jan
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Wed 19 Jan
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Wed 26 Jan
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Wed 2 Feb
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Wed 9 Feb
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Wed 16 Feb
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Wed 2 Mar
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Wed 9 Mar
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Wed 16 Mar
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Wed 23 Mar
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Wed 30 Mar
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Wed 6 Apr
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Art Appreciation (VA47 Summer)

If you’ve ever wanted to know the difference between Impressionism and Expressionism, Baroque and Rococo, Fauvism and Cubism or simply brush up on your knowledge, then this course is for you. An introduction to key periods in western art history for those who wish to gain an insight into important developments and discoveries in the world of art. You will also have the opportunity to produce some practical work that relates to relevant topics to gain a better understanding of techniques and concepts. During the course you will have special access to MAC’s Visual Arts Exhibitions programme, with curator talks and group visits to local galleries. What will you learn on this course? Using a mix of tutor led talks, group discussion and practical demonstrations the tutor will support you in your learning about key periods in western art history, it’s technical discoveries and contextual ideologies. You will develop your understanding and theoretical knowledge of key art movements.
You will have the opportunity to partake in some creative practical activities that relates to relevant topics. This may include short drawing, painting and collage exercises to enhance your understanding and you will be given one-to-one support as required. On completion of this course, you will have produced a detailed learning/visual journal containing notes, visual references and information with a selection of your own practical work. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. It is suitable for people who have little or no knowledge or art history that wish to learn through research and practical exercises. The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can participate in practical craft activities. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring a hardback, ringbound A4 sketchbook. Basic art materials will be provided but students will be expected to provide some of their own additional materials as the course progresses. There will also be access to free Wi-Fi so students are welcome to bring their own tablet or laptop devices for research. MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? Your sketchbook and any additional art materials are to be provided at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Angela Maloney MA

Wed 27 Apr
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Wed 4 May
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Wed 11 May
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Wed 18 May
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Wed 25 May
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Wed 8 Jun
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Wed 15 Jun
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Wed 22 Jun
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Wed 29 Jun
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Wed 6 Jul
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Wed 13 Jul
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Wed 20 Jul
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Art Explorers (CH07 Spring)

From animation to papier mache, up-cycling to land art, students are able to explore and experiment with many different materials. What will you learn on this course? On this course children will have the opportunity to experiment with a variety of different artistic materials, learn new creative techniques and develop their existing skills. They will work on a variety of projects. The children are encouraged to work through many elements of the creative process such as generating ideas, designing and making prototypes before making their finished ‘product’. There is a range of artistic techniques taught on this course including pottery, felting, animation, land art, papier mache, collage, up-cycling and weaving. Working both in groups and on individual projects encourages the students to develop confidence and team working skills. The course tutor demonstrates the art techniques, assists individuals with the development of their ideas and advises on how to create their final pieces of work. By the end of the course each child will have one large piece or a selection of smaller pieces of art work to take home. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for children aged 6 to 12 years. It is open to all ability levels and children don’t need any previous experience. Parents are not expected to accompany children on these courses. All our staff are DBS checked. The course is accessible for children with disabilities who can participate in practical art and craft activities. We provide a learning support worker and a parent or carer may assist their child if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to.

Sat 15 Jan
Weston Studio
Sat 22 Jan
Weston Studio
Sat 29 Jan
Weston Studio
Sat 5 Feb
Weston Studio
Sat 12 Feb
Weston Studio
Sat 19 Feb
Weston Studio
Sat 5 Mar
Weston Studio
Sat 12 Mar
Weston Studio
Sat 19 Mar
Weston Studio
Sat 26 Mar
Weston Studio
Sat 2 Apr
Weston Studio
Sat 9 Apr
Weston Studio

Art Explorers (CH07 Summer)

From animation to papier mache, up-cycling to land art, students are able to explore and experiment with many different materials. What will you learn on this course? On this course children will have the opportunity to experiment with a variety of different artistic materials, learn new creative techniques and develop their existing skills. They will work on a variety of projects. The children are encouraged to work through many elements of the creative process such as generating ideas, designing and making prototypes before making their finished ‘product’. There is a range of artistic techniques taught on this course including pottery, felting, animation, land art, papier mache, collage, up-cycling and weaving. Working both in groups and on individual projects encourages the students to develop confidence and team working skills. The course tutor demonstrates the art techniques, assists individuals with the development of their ideas and advises on how to create their final pieces of work. By the end of the course each child will have one large piece or a selection of smaller pieces of art work to take home. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for children aged 6 to 12 years. It is open to all ability levels and children don’t need any previous experience. Parents are not expected to accompany children on these courses. All our staff are DBS checked. The course is accessible for children with disabilities who can participate in practical art and craft activities. We provide a learning support worker and a parent or carer may assist their child if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to.

Sat 30 Apr
Weston Studio
Sat 7 May
Weston Studio
Sat 14 May
Weston Studio
Sat 21 May
Weston Studio
Sat 28 May
Weston Studio
Sat 11 Jun
Weston Studio
Sat 18 Jun
Weston Studio
Sat 25 Jun
Weston Studio
Sat 2 Jul
Weston Studio
Sat 9 Jul
Weston Studio
Sat 16 Jul
Weston Studio
Sat 23 Jul
Weston Studio

Art in Context (VA43 Spring)

A project-based class that encourages deeper research into a subject matter or artist that will inspire your creative thinking and develop your painting, drawing and mixed media skills. What will you learn on this course? Develop your painting, drawing and mixed-media skills, and a better understanding of art history, through a project-based programme of classes. The projects will focus on developing a range of painting and drawing skills through studying an artist, style or movement in art history. While this theme may vary from term to term there will be an emphasis on discussion and research into the history and context of the project theme. You will be encouraged to informally share artistic and historical research you have undertaken to inform and broaden the scope of your projects. There is a whole-group review at the end of term and you will learn a great deal from other members of the group. The course will begin with whole-group discussions and demonstrations relevant to the project. Subsequent teaching will be one-to-one with students guided according to their own level of experience to help them to achieve their aims for their work. You will be encouraged to interpret the projects in your own way, informing your ideas with appropriate research. Depending on the project emphasis, students will usually complete several paintings and have supporting drawings, paintings, photographs and research in their sketchbook and folder. You can also expect to have gained skills and confidence in painting and drawing and enjoyed working in a friendly, lively class of like-minded people. This is a two and a half hour class which includes an informal break. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. Beginners may be completely new to drawing and painting or may not have done it for some time. Improvers may have previously completed courses at MAC or elsewhere and will benefit from an opportunity to develop their skills further. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as the room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own expense. Who teaches this course? Helen Tarr

Mon 10 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 17 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 24 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 31 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 7 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 14 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 28 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 7 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 14 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 21 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 28 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 4 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Art in Context (VA43 Summer)

A project-based class that encourages deeper research into a subject matter or artist that will inspire your creative thinking and develop your painting, drawing and mixed media skills. What will you learn on this course? Develop your painting, drawing and mixed-media skills, and a better understanding of art history, through a project-based programme of classes. The projects will focus on developing a range of painting and drawing skills through studying an artist, style or movement in art history. While this theme may vary from term to term there will be an emphasis on discussion and research into the history and context of the project theme. You will be encouraged to informally share artistic and historical research you have undertaken to inform and broaden the scope of your projects. There is a whole-group review at the end of term and you will learn a great deal from other members of the group. The course will begin with whole-group discussions and demonstrations relevant to the project. Subsequent teaching will be one-to-one with students guided according to their own level of experience to help them to achieve their aims for their work. You will be encouraged to interpret the projects in your own way, informing your ideas with appropriate research. Depending on the project emphasis, students will usually complete several paintings and have supporting drawings, paintings, photographs and research in their sketchbook and folder. You can also expect to have gained skills and confidence in painting and drawing and enjoyed working in a friendly, lively class of like-minded people. This is a two and a half hour class which includes an informal break. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. Beginners may be completely new to drawing and painting or may not have done it for some time. Improvers may have previously completed courses at MAC or elsewhere and will benefit from an opportunity to develop their skills further. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as the room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own expense. Who teaches this course? Helen Tarr

Mon 25 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 2 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 9 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 16 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 23 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 6 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 13 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 20 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 27 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 4 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 11 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 18 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Art with Heart: Stan

Sam is a dinosaur loving 8-year-old whose world turns upside down after his parents separate. At school, he meets Alex, a deaf girl with a vivid imagination and impressive collection of dinosaurs. Bonding over their favourite T-Rex, the pair become friends. When home becomes difficult for Sam, Alex whisks him away on an adventure to meet Stan, the T-Rex at Manchester Museum. Stan celebrates the power of play, the joy of communication and the positive force of friendship. Featuring awesome animated dinosaurs, Stan is written and performed in English and British Sign Language and embeds creative captions within the set. One sentence selling point: Think Pixar’s Inside Out meets Night at the Museum- an exciting new play for children, written and performed in English and BSL, which explores communication, friendship, play, the family unit… and dinosaurs. Access: Stan is written and performed in English and British Sign Language and embeds creative captions within the set. The post-performance workshop will be BSL Interpreted. We have worked with Deaf-led organisations, deaf children and Manchester Deaf Centre in developing the production and supporting workshops.

Sat 19 Mar
Foyle Studio

£8–£12.50

Sun 20 Mar
Foyle Studio

£8–£12.50

Barbara Nice's Christmas Cracker

Dig out your best festive jumper, polish your baubles and join Kings Heath's most famous housewife (and star of Britain's Got Talent) for her annual Christmas shindig. Enjoy a comedy selection box of seasonal fun and games, including her legendary raffle.

Fri 17 Dec
Theatre

£10–£22

Basic Principles of Drawing for Beginners (VA103 Spring)

If you’ve never had the opportunity & support to learn how to draw or you are interested in enhancing your existing skills by exploring some of the fundamental aspects of drawing, then this course is for you. What will you learn on this course? Using a start ‘from scratch’ approach, you will make drawings using a variety of materials to explore line, form, tonal qualities, scale, proportion, mark making and perspective. You will also be shown how utilize various drawing systems to enhance your work. During the course you will be encouraged to record from observation, secondary source material and your imagination. The course will be in the form of practical demonstrations and workshops to develop your skills and also have the confidence to experiment. The tutor will tailor guidance and support to your level of experience. There will be opportunities for group discussions. On completing this course, you should gain an understanding of the key principle of drawing and how to use these within your own work. You will have produced a small portfolio of drawings to document your findings. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. It is suitable for people with no previous experience and those who wish to develop their drawing skills. The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can participate in practical creative activities. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring a set of pencils with various grades of graphite (i.e 2H, HB, 4B, 6B) MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? Any additional art materials are to be provided at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Angela Maloney

Tue 11 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 18 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 25 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 1 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 8 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 15 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 1 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 8 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 15 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 22 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 29 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 5 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Basic Principles of Drawing for Beginners (VA103 Summer)

If you’ve never had the opportunity & support to learn how to draw or you are interested in enhancing your existing skills by exploring some of the fundamental aspects of drawing, then this course is for you. What will you learn on this course? Using a start ‘from scratch’ approach, you will make drawings using a variety of materials to explore line, form, tonal qualities, scale, proportion, mark making and perspective. You will also be shown how utilize various drawing systems to enhance your work. During the course you will be encouraged to record from observation, secondary source material and your imagination. The course will be in the form of practical demonstrations and workshops to develop your skills and also have the confidence to experiment. The tutor will tailor guidance and support to your level of experience. There will be opportunities for group discussions. On completing this course, you should gain an understanding of the key principle of drawing and how to use these within your own work. You will have produced a small portfolio of drawings to document your findings. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. It is suitable for people with no previous experience and those who wish to develop their drawing skills. The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can participate in practical creative activities. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring a set of pencils with various grades of graphite (i.e 2H, HB, 4B, 6B) MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? Any additional art materials are to be provided at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Angela Maloney

Tue 26 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 3 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 10 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 17 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 24 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 7 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 14 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 21 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 28 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 5 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 12 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 19 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

A Beginners Guide to Painting with Watercolours (VA05 Spring)

An introduction to the materials and techniques required to produce exciting watercolours including drawing, composition and colour-mixing. What will you learn on this course? A beginners’ guide to painting in watercolours This termly course will give you an introduction to a range of watercolour techniques, and enable you to build confidence when painting in this medium. Starting with a subject matter such as natural forms, landscapes, flowers, or still life you will have the opportunity to create a series of works that involve some of the following skills. • Creating a balanced composition • Developing a draft drawing • Mixing colours • Blending and layering • Wet - on – wet • Wet – on - dry • Building tone • Adding texture through mark making There will be opportunity to discuss ideas and intentions with the group and you will receive support in developing your own independent artistic style. The tutor will develop a guided programme of study with the group, providing demonstrations and one-to-one support as required. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners who may be completely new to watercolours or may not have worked in this medium for some time. You don’t need any previous painting experience as full instruction is given. The course is accessible for people with disabilities. The room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Watercolour paper is provided and also basic art materials may be borrowed on the day, such as pencils, erasers, sharpeners, brushes and paint. You may wish to bring additional art materials to work with. MAC can provide basic equipment and materials to participants attending most courses if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own expense. This would typically include watercolour paints, brushes and palettes. Who teaches this course? Emily-Kriste Wilcox

Tue 11 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£151 (£136)

Tue 18 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£151 (£136)

Tue 25 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£151 (£136)

Tue 1 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£151 (£136)

Tue 8 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£151 (£136)

Tue 15 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£151 (£136)

Tue 1 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£151 (£136)

Tue 8 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£151 (£136)

Tue 15 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£151 (£136)

Tue 22 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£151 (£136)

Tue 29 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£151 (£136)

Tue 5 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£151 (£136)

A Beginners Guide to Painting with Watercolours (VA05 Summer)

An introduction to the materials and techniques required to produce exciting watercolours including drawing, composition and colour-mixing. What will you learn on this course? A beginners’ guide to painting in watercolours This termly course will give you an introduction to a range of watercolour techniques, and enable you to build confidence when painting in this medium. Starting with a subject matter such as natural forms, landscapes, flowers, or still life you will have the opportunity to create a series of works that involve some of the following skills. • Creating a balanced composition • Developing a draft drawing • Mixing colours • Blending and layering • Wet - on – wet • Wet – on - dry • Building tone • Adding texture through mark making There will be opportunity to discuss ideas and intentions with the group and you will receive support in developing your own independent artistic style. The tutor will develop a guided programme of study with the group, providing demonstrations and one-to-one support as required. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners who may be completely new to watercolours or may not have worked in this medium for some time. You don’t need any previous painting experience as full instruction is given. The course is accessible for people with disabilities. The room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Watercolour paper is provided and also basic art materials may be borrowed on the day, such as pencils, erasers, sharpeners, brushes and paint. You may wish to bring additional art materials to work with. MAC can provide basic equipment and materials to participants attending most courses if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own expense. This would typically include watercolour paints, brushes and palettes. Who teaches this course? Emily-Kriste Wilcox

Tue 26 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£151 (£136)

Tue 3 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£151 (£136)

Tue 10 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£151 (£136)

Tue 17 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£151 (£136)

Tue 24 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£151 (£136)

Tue 7 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£151 (£136)

Tue 14 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£151 (£136)

Tue 21 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£151 (£136)

Tue 28 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£151 (£136)

Tue 5 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£151 (£136)

Tue 12 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£151 (£136)

Tue 19 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£151 (£136)

Birmingham Bangla Film Festival: Meghmallar

Meghmallar is a touching story set in the monsoon of 1971 that sees an ordinary family find themselves going through a life altering experience in a span of just three days, just as the Liberation War for Bangladesh starts to gain momentum. This 2014 Bangladeshi drama is an adaption of writer Akhtaruzzaman Elias's story Raincoat and was screened in the Discovery section of the 2015 Toronto International Film Festival.

The screening will be followed by a virtual Q&A with director Zahidur Rahman Anjan.

Screening in partnership with Birmingham Indian Film Festival and Sampad Arts and part of Purbanat's year-long celebration of the 50th Anniversary of Bangladesh Independence, funded by Birmingham City Council.

The screening will be preceded by a cultural presentation from Bangladeshi activists sharing their experiences in Birmingham during the events depicted in Recognising Bangladesh, including live music and poetry recitation.

Thu 16 Dec
Cinema

£8

Body Percussion (DA102 Spring)

Play the Body, Dance the Body Join us for a 10-week course in Body Percussion, creating your own rhythms to dance in a fun, sociable and safe environment. What will you learn on this course? Learn to feel and hear the music through beat and rhythm, and understand the process of music making. Through weekly sessions, you’ll discover how to use your body to make interesting sounds across genres such as Samba, Flamenco and Afro beats, as well as creating your own rhythms to dance to. This is the perfect course for those interested in dance, rhythm, music, and movement and wanting to improve their skill. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+. It is suitable for beginners and no previous experience is necessary. Do you need to bring anything? Participants should wear clothes that are comfortable. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Thomas O'Flaherty

Mon 10 Jan
English Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 17 Jan
English Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 24 Jan
English Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 31 Jan
English Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 7 Feb
English Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 14 Feb
English Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 28 Feb
English Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 7 Mar
English Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 14 Mar
English Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 21 Mar
English Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 28 Mar
English Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 4 Apr
English Studio

£118 (£107)

Body Percussion (DA102 Summer)

Play the Body, Dance the Body Join us for a 10-week course in Body Percussion, creating your own rhythms to dance in a fun, sociable and safe environment. What will you learn on this course? Learn to feel and hear the music through beat and rhythm, and understand the process of music making. Through weekly sessions, you’ll discover how to use your body to make interesting sounds across genres such as Samba, Flamenco and Afro beats, as well as creating your own rhythms to dance to. This is the perfect course for those interested in dance, rhythm, music, and movement and wanting to improve their skill. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+. It is suitable for beginners and no previous experience is necessary. Do you need to bring anything? Participants should wear clothes that are comfortable. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Thomas O'Flaherty

Mon 25 Apr
English Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 2 May
English Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 9 May
English Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 16 May
English Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 23 May
English Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 6 Jun
English Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 13 Jun
English Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 20 Jun
English Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 27 Jun
English Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 4 Jul
English Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 11 Jul
English Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 18 Jul
English Studio

£118 (£107)

Boiling Point

Boiling Point
  • 2021
  • UK
  • 1h 32min
  • 15
  • Directed by: Philip Barantini
  • Written by: Philip Barantini, James Cummings
  • Cast: Stephen Graham, Vinette Robinson, Alice Feetham

It's the busiest night of the year at a hot London restaurant. Head Chef Andy Jones (Stephen Graham) has to manage his crew, management, his customers insane demands, a surprise visit from the health inspectors and on-top of all of this, a few personal crises headed his way.

Fri 7 Jan
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Sat 8 Jan
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Sun 9 Jan
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Mon 10 Jan
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Tue 11 Jan
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Wed 12 Jan
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Thu 13 Jan
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Capoeira for Children (CH11 Spring)

Capoeira is an exciting Brazilian art form comprising martial arts, dance & acrobatics practiced to music. What will you learn on this course?

Capoeira is a fusion of Fitness, Acrobatics, Self-Defence, Dance and Music. It helps to develop:

confidence self-discipline respect physical fitness strength stamina flexibility balance coordination self-esteem creativity and learning

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for children aged 6 - 12 years and open to beginners and improvers. The class is adapted to suit the needs of the participants and a fun way to learn new skills and techniques.

The course may be accessible for children with learning disabilities as we can provide a learning support worker however a certain amount of movement is required for this course and therefore less suitable for children with physical disabilities. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs.

Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to.

Do you need to bring anything? Participants need to bring a water based drink to every session and wear suitable clothing that allows them to move freely such as tracksuit bottoms/leggings and a close fitting t-shirt/vest top with a warmer top to put on after the session. Children will need pumps or trainers. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs for this course. Who teaches this course? Vicky Hawkesford

Wed 12 Jan
Randle Studio
Wed 19 Jan
Randle Studio
Wed 26 Jan
Randle Studio
Wed 2 Feb
Randle Studio
Wed 9 Feb
Randle Studio
Wed 16 Feb
Randle Studio
Wed 2 Mar
Randle Studio
Wed 9 Mar
Randle Studio
Wed 16 Mar
Randle Studio
Wed 23 Mar
Randle Studio
Wed 30 Mar
Randle Studio
Wed 6 Apr
Randle Studio

Capoeira for Children (CH11 Summer)

Capoeira is an exciting Brazilian art form comprising martial arts, dance & acrobatics practiced to music. What will you learn on this course?

Capoeira is a fusion of Fitness, Acrobatics, Self-Defence, Dance and Music. It helps to develop:

confidence self-discipline respect physical fitness strength stamina flexibility balance coordination self-esteem creativity and learning

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for children aged 6 - 12 years and open to beginners and improvers. The class is adapted to suit the needs of the participants and a fun way to learn new skills and techniques.

The course may be accessible for children with learning disabilities as we can provide a learning support worker however a certain amount of movement is required for this course and therefore less suitable for children with physical disabilities. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs.

Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to.

Do you need to bring anything? Participants need to bring a water based drink to every session and wear suitable clothing that allows them to move freely such as tracksuit bottoms/leggings and a close fitting t-shirt/vest top with a warmer top to put on after the session. Children will need pumps or trainers. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs for this course. Who teaches this course? Vicky Hawkesford

Wed 27 Apr
Randle Studio

Children £25

Wed 4 May
Randle Studio

Children £25

Wed 11 May
Randle Studio

Children £25

Wed 18 May
Randle Studio

Children £25

Wed 25 May
Randle Studio

Children £25

Wed 8 Jun
Randle Studio

Children £25

Wed 15 Jun
Randle Studio

Children £25

Wed 22 Jun
Randle Studio

Children £25

Wed 29 Jun
Randle Studio

Children £25

Wed 6 Jul
Randle Studio

Children £25

Wed 13 Jul
Randle Studio

Children £25

Wed 20 Jul
Randle Studio

Children £25

Ceramic Forms & Sculpture (CE108 Spring)

Explore and experiment with exciting processes to realise your own ideas in ceramic. What will you learn on this course? Realise your own ideas in ceramic, whether you are interested in making a sculpture or a simple project. Get inspired by art, nature and anything else you like! The tutor will guide you through the process of creating the work including: • Researching and developing your ideas • Producing drawings and designs • Visualising 3D forms • Construction techniques • Understanding the properties of materials and how to work with them • Choosing the most appropriate medium • Finishing techniques including ceramic decoration and firing. You will learn to develop your observational and representational skills and gain an understanding of scale, proportion and mass. The tutor will demonstrate techniques and materials and provide one-to-one support on your individual project. Coming on this course is a great way to experience working with other like-minded people in a relaxed studio environment. By the end of the course you should have a finished ceramic piece made to your own design. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners. You don’t need any previous sculpting experience as full tuition is give. This course is perfect for students interested in learning how to realise their own projects in clay. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities. You do need dexterity in your hands. Students may bring their own carer or support worker. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? All materials and equipment is provided. You should bring any images, objects, materials, sketchbooks that might inspire your work. MAC will provide equipment and materials for participants, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own tools where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be a charge for clay and firing of any oversize work please refer to the tutor. Who teaches this course? Martin McNally

Tue 11 Jan

£169 (£153)

Tue 18 Jan

£169 (£153)

Tue 25 Jan

£169 (£153)

Tue 1 Feb

£169 (£153)

Tue 8 Feb

£169 (£153)

Tue 15 Feb

£169 (£153)

Tue 1 Mar

£169 (£153)

Tue 8 Mar

£169 (£153)

Tue 15 Mar

£169 (£153)

Tue 22 Mar

£169 (£153)

Tue 29 Mar

£169 (£153)

Tue 5 Apr

£169 (£153)

Ceramic Forms & Sculpture (CE108 Summer)

Explore and experiment with exciting processes to realise your own ideas in ceramic. What will you learn on this course? Realise your own ideas in ceramic, whether you are interested in making a sculpture or a simple project. Get inspired by art, nature and anything else you like! The tutor will guide you through the process of creating the work including: • Researching and developing your ideas • Producing drawings and designs • Visualising 3D forms • Construction techniques • Understanding the properties of materials and how to work with them • Choosing the most appropriate medium • Finishing techniques including ceramic decoration and firing. You will learn to develop your observational and representational skills and gain an understanding of scale, proportion and mass. The tutor will demonstrate techniques and materials and provide one-to-one support on your individual project. Coming on this course is a great way to experience working with other like-minded people in a relaxed studio environment. By the end of the course you should have a finished ceramic piece made to your own design. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners. You don’t need any previous sculpting experience as full tuition is give. This course is perfect for students interested in learning how to realise their own projects in clay. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities. You do need dexterity in your hands. Students may bring their own carer or support worker. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? All materials and equipment is provided. You should bring any images, objects, materials, sketchbooks that might inspire your work. MAC will provide equipment and materials for participants, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own tools where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be a charge for clay and firing of any oversize work please refer to the tutor. Who teaches this course? Martin McNally

Tue 26 Apr

£169 (£153)

Tue 3 May

£169 (£153)

Tue 10 May

£169 (£153)

Tue 17 May

£169 (£153)

Tue 24 May

£169 (£153)

Tue 7 Jun

£169 (£153)

Tue 14 Jun

£169 (£153)

Tue 21 Jun

£169 (£153)

Tue 28 Jun

£169 (£153)

Tue 5 Jul

£169 (£153)

Tue 12 Jul

£169 (£153)

Tue 19 Jul

£169 (£153)

Ceramic Forms: Natural Inspiration (CE03 Spring)

This course will cover basic techniques such as thumb pot, coiling and slab building using natural forms and patterns as inspiration. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn basic ceramics techniques such as thumb pots, coiling and slab building. Decorative techniques will be also taught, introducing textures, coloured slip decoration, glazing techniques and the firing process. This course will also cover the history of ceramics and examine how different cultures have used clay and the decorative process, placing this in context with contemporary approaches. Taking inspiration from the natural forms of plants and animals, you will be taught how to translate these ideas into your own unique designs. Using the ceramics skills you have learned you will choose the appropriate techniques to realise your design in clay. The course tutor will encourage you to develop your individual interests and styles and support you through to the completion of your project. Any work you produce on this course is yours to take home. Our fully equipped pottery studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kilns. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to students of all levels. Beginners don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be a clay and firing charge for any oversized work, please discuss with the tutor. Who teaches this course? Sue Dyer

Tue 11 Jan

£192 (£174)

Tue 18 Jan

£192 (£174)

Tue 25 Jan

£192 (£174)

Tue 1 Feb

£192 (£174)

Tue 8 Feb

£192 (£174)

Tue 15 Feb

£192 (£174)

Tue 1 Mar

£192 (£174)

Tue 8 Mar

£192 (£174)

Tue 15 Mar

£192 (£174)

Tue 22 Mar

£192 (£174)

Tue 29 Mar

£192 (£174)

Tue 5 Apr

£192 (£174)

Ceramic Forms: Natural Inspiration (CE03 Summer)

This course will cover basic techniques such as thumb pot, coiling and slab building using natural forms and patterns as inspiration. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn basic ceramics techniques such as thumb pots, coiling and slab building. Decorative techniques will be also taught, introducing textures, coloured slip decoration, glazing techniques and the firing process. This course will also cover the history of ceramics and examine how different cultures have used clay and the decorative process, placing this in context with contemporary approaches. Taking inspiration from the natural forms of plants and animals, you will be taught how to translate these ideas into your own unique designs. Using the ceramics skills you have learned you will choose the appropriate techniques to realise your design in clay. The course tutor will encourage you to develop your individual interests and styles and support you through to the completion of your project. Any work you produce on this course is yours to take home. Our fully equipped pottery studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kilns. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to students of all levels. Beginners don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be a clay and firing charge for any oversized work, please discuss with the tutor. Who teaches this course? Sue Dyer

Tue 26 Apr

£182 (£164)

Tue 3 May

£182 (£164)

Tue 10 May

£182 (£164)

Tue 17 May

£182 (£164)

Tue 24 May

£182 (£164)

Tue 7 Jun

£182 (£164)

Tue 14 Jun

£182 (£164)

Tue 21 Jun

£182 (£164)

Tue 28 Jun

£182 (£164)

Tue 5 Jul

£182 (£164)

Tue 12 Jul

£182 (£164)

Tue 19 Jul

£182 (£164)

Ceramic Forms: Natural Inspiration (CE89 Spring)

This course will cover basic techniques such as thumb pot, coiling and slab building using natural forms and patterns as inspiration. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn basic ceramics techniques such as thumb pots, coiling and slab building. Decorative techniques will be also taught, introducing textures, coloured slip decoration, glazing techniques and the firing process. This course will also cover the history of ceramics and examine how different cultures have used clay and the decorative process, placing this in context with contemporary approaches. Taking inspiration from the natural forms of plants and animals, you will be taught how to translate these ideas into your own unique designs. Using the ceramics skills you have learned you will choose the appropriate techniques to realise your design in clay. The course tutor will encourage you to develop your individual interests and styles and support you through to the completion of your project. Any work you produce on this course is yours to take home. Our fully equipped pottery studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kilns. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to students of all levels. Beginners don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be a clay and firing charge for any oversized work, please discuss with the tutor. Who teaches this course? Sue Dyer

Tue 11 Jan

£182 (£164)

Tue 18 Jan

£182 (£164)

Tue 25 Jan

£182 (£164)

Tue 1 Feb

£182 (£164)

Tue 8 Feb

£182 (£164)

Tue 15 Feb

£182 (£164)

Tue 1 Mar

£182 (£164)

Tue 8 Mar

£182 (£164)

Tue 15 Mar

£182 (£164)

Tue 22 Mar

£182 (£164)

Tue 29 Mar

£182 (£164)

Tue 5 Apr

£182 (£164)

Ceramic Forms: Natural Inspiration (CE89 Summer)

This course will cover basic techniques such as thumb pot, coiling and slab building using natural forms and patterns as inspiration. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn basic ceramics techniques such as thumb pots, coiling and slab building. Decorative techniques will be also taught, introducing textures, coloured slip decoration, glazing techniques and the firing process. This course will also cover the history of ceramics and examine how different cultures have used clay and the decorative process, placing this in context with contemporary approaches. Taking inspiration from the natural forms of plants and animals, you will be taught how to translate these ideas into your own unique designs. Using the ceramics skills you have learned you will choose the appropriate techniques to realise your design in clay. The course tutor will encourage you to develop your individual interests and styles and support you through to the completion of your project. Any work you produce on this course is yours to take home. Our fully equipped pottery studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kilns. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to students of all levels. Beginners don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be a clay and firing charge for any oversized work, please discuss with the tutor. Who teaches this course? Sue Dyer

Tue 26 Apr

£182 (£164)

Tue 3 May

£182 (£164)

Tue 10 May

£182 (£164)

Tue 17 May

£182 (£164)

Tue 24 May

£182 (£164)

Tue 7 Jun

£182 (£164)

Tue 14 Jun

£182 (£164)

Tue 21 Jun

£182 (£164)

Tue 28 Jun

£182 (£164)

Tue 5 Jul

£182 (£164)

Tue 12 Jul

£182 (£164)

Tue 19 Jul

£182 (£164)

Ceramics: Introduction to Handbuilding (CE14 Spring)

Explore the versatility of clay as a material, through traditional handbuilding techniques such as coiling, slabwork and press moulding.

What will you learn on this course?

You will be guided through a number of tutor-led demos and set tasks which will introduce particular tips and techniques in order for you to create a range of pieces.

The course will cover the following skills and techniques:

• how to successfully develop 2d designs into 3d objects • construction techniques • understanding of the materials and different stages of making • options for design, building, and quality of finish • slip decoration and imprinted texture • brush on glazing

In addition there will be opportunity to discuss ideas and intentions with the group and you will receive support in developing your own independent artistic style. The tutor will develop a guided programme of study with the group providing demonstrations and one-to-one support as required. You are encouraged to develop your own ideas within the parameters of creating slab pots with surface decoration. Use of a personal sketchbook is encouraged throughout this course, to enable the development of ideas, and of the student’s own working style. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, glazes, all necessary tools and the firing kiln. On completion of this course you will have broadened your ceramics skills and learned new techniques for the realisation of your own design. Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginner level students and those wishing to improve their practice.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities who have the relevant ceramics experience and a support worker or carer may assist if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC will provide equipment and materials for participants, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own tools where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission.

Are there any additional costs?

There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be a charge for clay and firing of any oversize work please refer to the tutor. Who teaches this course? Emily-Kriste Wilcox

Mon 10 Jan

£192 (£173)

Mon 17 Jan

£192 (£173)

Mon 24 Jan

£192 (£173)

Mon 31 Jan

£192 (£173)

Mon 7 Feb

£192 (£173)

Mon 14 Feb

£192 (£173)

Mon 28 Feb

£192 (£173)

Mon 7 Mar

£192 (£173)

Mon 14 Mar

£192 (£173)

Mon 21 Mar

£192 (£173)

Mon 28 Mar

£192 (£173)

Mon 4 Apr

£192 (£173)

Ceramics: Introduction to Handbuilding (CE14 Summer)

Explore the versatility of clay as a material, through traditional handbuilding techniques such as coiling, slabwork and press moulding.

What will you learn on this course?

You will be guided through a number of tutor-led demos and set tasks which will introduce particular tips and techniques in order for you to create a range of pieces.

The course will cover the following skills and techniques:

• how to successfully develop 2d designs into 3d objects • construction techniques • understanding of the materials and different stages of making • options for design, building, and quality of finish • slip decoration and imprinted texture • brush on glazing

In addition there will be opportunity to discuss ideas and intentions with the group and you will receive support in developing your own independent artistic style. The tutor will develop a guided programme of study with the group providing demonstrations and one-to-one support as required. You are encouraged to develop your own ideas within the parameters of creating slab pots with surface decoration. Use of a personal sketchbook is encouraged throughout this course, to enable the development of ideas, and of the student’s own working style. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, glazes, all necessary tools and the firing kiln. On completion of this course you will have broadened your ceramics skills and learned new techniques for the realisation of your own design. Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginner level students and those wishing to improve their practice.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities who have the relevant ceramics experience and a support worker or carer may assist if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC will provide equipment and materials for participants, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own tools where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission.

Are there any additional costs?

There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be a charge for clay and firing of any oversize work please refer to the tutor. Who teaches this course? Emily-Kriste Wilcox

Mon 25 Apr

£192 (£173)

Mon 2 May

£192 (£173)

Mon 9 May

£192 (£173)

Mon 16 May

£192 (£173)

Mon 23 May

£192 (£173)

Mon 6 Jun

£192 (£173)

Mon 13 Jun

£192 (£173)

Mon 20 Jun

£192 (£173)

Mon 27 Jun

£192 (£173)

Mon 4 Jul

£192 (£173)

Mon 11 Jul

£192 (£173)

Mon 18 Jul

£192 (£173)

Ceramics Workshop (CE07 Spring)

Develop and broaden your knowledge of ceramics through set exercises and demonstrations. What will you learn on this course? In this weekly class you will have the opportunity to broaden your knowledge of ceramics by completing a series of set exercises. Your tutor will demonstrate a range of hand building techniques such as throwing, coiling, and slab building. Surface treatments in clay can also be considered such as relief details and engraved pattern work. Demonstrations on the use of coloured slips and various glazing techniques such as dipping, pouring and spraying will allow for further experimentation in the final stages of the decorating process. You will be encouraged to explore and experiment with each technique to produce a collection of ceramic pieces. The tutor will give whole class demonstrations of the various techniques in the early stages of the course and then individual, specialist guidance will be given on your projects as and when it’s needed. Further demonstrations of specific techniques can also be given to smaller numbers within the group or one-to-one upon request. Those learners with more experience will be able to self-direct their work and the tutor will offer guidance as and when it’s needed. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kiln. On completion of this course you will have broadened your ceramics skills and learned new techniques through the development of a collection of work. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to students of all levels. You don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or carer may assist and all classes are planned to meet the specific needs of the group. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be an additional charge for clay and firing of any oversized work, refer to the tutor for guidance. Who teaches this course? Libby Gillies

Wed 12 Jan

£196 (£169)

Wed 19 Jan

£196 (£169)

Wed 26 Jan

£196 (£169)

Wed 2 Feb

£196 (£169)

Wed 9 Feb

£196 (£169)

Wed 16 Feb

£196 (£169)

Wed 2 Mar

£196 (£169)

Wed 9 Mar

£196 (£169)

Wed 16 Mar

£196 (£169)

Wed 23 Mar

£196 (£169)

Wed 30 Mar

£196 (£169)

Wed 6 Apr

£196 (£169)

Ceramics Workshop (CE07 Summer)

Develop and broaden your knowledge of ceramics through set exercises and demonstrations. What will you learn on this course? In this weekly class you will have the opportunity to broaden your knowledge of ceramics by completing a series of set exercises. Your tutor will demonstrate a range of hand building techniques such as throwing, coiling, and slab building. Surface treatments in clay can also be considered such as relief details and engraved pattern work. Demonstrations on the use of coloured slips and various glazing techniques such as dipping, pouring and spraying will allow for further experimentation in the final stages of the decorating process. You will be encouraged to explore and experiment with each technique to produce a collection of ceramic pieces. The tutor will give whole class demonstrations of the various techniques in the early stages of the course and then individual, specialist guidance will be given on your projects as and when it’s needed. Further demonstrations of specific techniques can also be given to smaller numbers within the group or one-to-one upon request. Those learners with more experience will be able to self-direct their work and the tutor will offer guidance as and when it’s needed. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kiln. On completion of this course you will have broadened your ceramics skills and learned new techniques through the development of a collection of work. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to students of all levels. You don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or carer may assist and all classes are planned to meet the specific needs of the group. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be an additional charge for clay and firing of any oversized work, refer to the tutor for guidance. Who teaches this course? Libby Gillies

Wed 27 Apr

£176 (£159)

Wed 4 May

£176 (£159)

Wed 11 May

£176 (£159)

Wed 18 May

£176 (£159)

Wed 25 May

£176 (£159)

Wed 8 Jun

£176 (£159)

Wed 15 Jun

£176 (£159)

Wed 22 Jun

£176 (£159)

Wed 29 Jun

£176 (£159)

Wed 6 Jul

£176 (£159)

Wed 13 Jul

£176 (£159)

Wed 20 Jul

£176 (£159)

Clothing Poverty: Exposed

Clothing Poverty: Exposed is a short documentary exposing the truth about the most hidden aspect of poverty in the UK today - lack of access to clothing. What does it mean to really have nothing to wear? Who does clothing poverty affect, and what impact does it have? These questions and more will be answered by this powerful short film, shot in 2021 at Sharewear Clothing Scheme's Nottingham and Sheffield centres and packed with revealing interviews with those that Sharewear support and the organisations we work with to make that happen, including Framework, NUH Hospitals, Jericho Road Project and Futures.

The screening will be followed by a Q&A with Louise Cooke, CEO of Sharewear Clothing Scheme.

Sat 22 Jan

C'mon C'mon

C'mon C'mon
  • 2021
  • US
  • 1h 48min
  • 15
  • Directed by: Mike Mills
  • Cast: Joaquin Phoenix, Gaby Hoffmann, Scoot McNairy, Molly Webster, Jaboukie Young-White, Woody Norman

After gracing audiences with Beginners and 20th Century Women, writer-director Mike Mills returns with another warm, insightful, and gratifyingly askew portrait of American family life. A soulful Joaquin Phoenix plays Johnny, a kindhearted radio journalist deep into a project in which he interviews children across the U.S. about our world’s uncertain future. His sister, Viv (a marvelously intuitive Gaby Hoffmann), asks him to watch her 9-year-old son, Jesse (Woody Norman, in one of the most affecting breakout child performances in years), while she tends to the child’s father, who’s suffering from mental health issues. After agreeing, Johnny finds himself connecting with his nephew in ways he hadn’t expected, ultimately taking Jesse with him on a journey from Los Angeles to New York to New Orleans. Anchored by three remarkable actors, C’mon C’mon is a gentle yet impeccably crafted drama about coming to terms with personal trauma and historical legacies.

Fri 14 Jan
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Sun 16 Jan
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Mon 17 Jan
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Coloured Clays, Porcelain and Basic Mould Making (CE101 Spring)

Use coloured clays and porcelain to develop decorative techniques such as marbling, agateware, applique, inlay and layering. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn basic ceramics techniques such as thumb pots, coiling, press and slip casting moulds, glazing techniques and the firing process. In addition coloured clays and porcelain are available for students to develop decorative techniques such as marbling, agateware, appliqué, inlay and layering. With the availability of coloured clay we can offer the opportunity to develop larger scale sculptural pieces. You will also learn basic mould making techniques such as press moulds and multiple piece moulds. Initially moulds will be cast from found objects but you will also have the opportunity to design your own mould shapes.
You will be encouraged to develop your own ideas and the tutor will teach you how to translate these ideas into your own unique designs. Using the ceramics skills you have learned you will choose the appropriate techniques to realise your design in clay. The course tutor will encourage you to develop your individual interests and styles and support you through to the completion of your project. Any work you produce on this course is yours to take home. Our fully equipped pottery studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kilns. Please note that due to COVID-19 moulds created in this course will be restricted by size to ensure participants are able to use them independently. Participants are also welcome to bring and use moulds they have created in the past. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. Beginners don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to learn new techniques or work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. Do you need to bring anything? MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be a charge for clay and firing of any oversized work, please refer to the tutor for guidance. Who teaches this course? Sue Dyer

Fri 14 Jan
Ceramics Studio 3

£202 (£183)

Fri 21 Jan
Ceramics Studio 3

£202 (£183)

Fri 28 Jan
Ceramics Studio 3

£202 (£183)

Fri 4 Feb
Ceramics Studio 3

£202 (£183)

Fri 11 Feb
Ceramics Studio 3

£202 (£183)

Fri 18 Feb
Ceramics Studio 3

£202 (£183)

Fri 4 Mar
Ceramics Studio 3

£202 (£183)

Fri 11 Mar
Ceramics Studio 3

£202 (£183)

Fri 18 Mar
Ceramics Studio 3

£202 (£183)

Fri 25 Mar
Ceramics Studio 3

£202 (£183)

Fri 1 Apr
Ceramics Studio 3

£202 (£183)

Fri 8 Apr
Ceramics Studio 3

£202 (£183)

Coloured Clays, Porcelain and Basic Mould Making (CE101 Summer)

Use coloured clays and porcelain to develop decorative techniques such as marbling, agateware, applique, inlay and layering. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn basic ceramics techniques such as thumb pots, coiling, press and slip casting moulds, glazing techniques and the firing process. In addition coloured clays and porcelain are available for students to develop decorative techniques such as marbling, agateware, appliqué, inlay and layering. With the availability of coloured clay we can offer the opportunity to develop larger scale sculptural pieces. You will also learn basic mould making techniques such as press moulds and multiple piece moulds. Initially moulds will be cast from found objects but you will also have the opportunity to design your own mould shapes.
You will be encouraged to develop your own ideas and the tutor will teach you how to translate these ideas into your own unique designs. Using the ceramics skills you have learned you will choose the appropriate techniques to realise your design in clay. The course tutor will encourage you to develop your individual interests and styles and support you through to the completion of your project. Any work you produce on this course is yours to take home. Our fully equipped pottery studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kilns. Please note that due to COVID-19 moulds created in this course will be restricted by size to ensure participants are able to use them independently. Participants are also welcome to bring and use moulds they have created in the past. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. Beginners don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to learn new techniques or work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. Do you need to bring anything? MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be a charge for clay and firing of any oversized work, please refer to the tutor for guidance. Who teaches this course? Sue Dyer

Fri 29 Apr
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Fri 6 May
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Fri 13 May
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Fri 20 May
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Fri 27 May
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Fri 10 Jun
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Fri 17 Jun
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Fri 24 Jun
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Fri 1 Jul
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Fri 8 Jul
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Fri 15 Jul
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Fri 22 Jul
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Coloured Clays, Porcelain and Basic Mould Making (CE95 Spring)

Use coloured clays and porcelain to develop decorative techniques such as marbling, agateware, applique, inlay and layering. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn basic ceramics techniques such as thumb pots, coiling, press and slip casting moulds, glazing techniques and the firing process. In addition coloured clays and porcelain are available for students to develop decorative techniques such as marbling, agateware, appliqué, inlay and layering. With the availability of coloured clay we can offer the opportunity to develop larger scale sculptural pieces. You will also learn basic mould making techniques such as press moulds and multiple piece moulds. Initially moulds will be cast from found objects but you will also have the opportunity to design your own mould shapes.
You will be encouraged to develop your own ideas and the tutor will teach you how to translate these ideas into your own unique designs. Using the ceramics skills you have learned you will choose the appropriate techniques to realise your design in clay. The course tutor will encourage you to develop your individual interests and styles and support you through to the completion of your project. Any work you produce on this course is yours to take home. Our fully equipped pottery studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kilns. Please note that due to COVID-19 moulds created in this course will be restricted by size to ensure participants are able to use them independently. Participants are also welcome to bring and use moulds they have created in the past. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. Beginners don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to learn new techniques or work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. Do you need to bring anything? MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be a charge for clay and firing of any oversized work, please refer to the tutor for guidance. Who teaches this course? Sue Dyer

Fri 14 Jan
Ceramics Studio 3

£202 (£183)

Fri 21 Jan
Ceramics Studio 3

£202 (£183)

Fri 28 Jan
Ceramics Studio 3

£202 (£183)

Fri 4 Feb
Ceramics Studio 3

£202 (£183)

Fri 11 Feb
Ceramics Studio 3

£202 (£183)

Fri 18 Feb
Ceramics Studio 3

£202 (£183)

Fri 4 Mar
Ceramics Studio 3

£202 (£183)

Fri 11 Mar
Ceramics Studio 3

£202 (£183)

Fri 18 Mar
Ceramics Studio 3

£202 (£183)

Fri 25 Mar
Ceramics Studio 3

£202 (£183)

Fri 1 Apr
Ceramics Studio 3

£202 (£183)

Fri 8 Apr
Ceramics Studio 3

£202 (£183)

Coloured Clays, Porcelain and Basic Mould Making (CE95 Summer)

Use coloured clays and porcelain to develop decorative techniques such as marbling, agateware, applique, inlay and layering. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn basic ceramics techniques such as thumb pots, coiling, press and slip casting moulds, glazing techniques and the firing process. In addition coloured clays and porcelain are available for students to develop decorative techniques such as marbling, agateware, appliqué, inlay and layering. With the availability of coloured clay we can offer the opportunity to develop larger scale sculptural pieces. You will also learn basic mould making techniques such as press moulds and multiple piece moulds. Initially moulds will be cast from found objects but you will also have the opportunity to design your own mould shapes.
You will be encouraged to develop your own ideas and the tutor will teach you how to translate these ideas into your own unique designs. Using the ceramics skills you have learned you will choose the appropriate techniques to realise your design in clay. The course tutor will encourage you to develop your individual interests and styles and support you through to the completion of your project. Any work you produce on this course is yours to take home. Our fully equipped pottery studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kilns. Please note that due to COVID-19 moulds created in this course will be restricted by size to ensure participants are able to use them independently. Participants are also welcome to bring and use moulds they have created in the past. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. Beginners don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to learn new techniques or work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. Do you need to bring anything? MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be a charge for clay and firing of any oversized work, please refer to the tutor for guidance. Who teaches this course? Sue Dyer

Fri 29 Apr
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Fri 6 May
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Fri 13 May
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Fri 20 May
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Fri 27 May
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Fri 10 Jun
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Fri 17 Jun
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Fri 24 Jun
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Fri 1 Jul
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Fri 8 Jul
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Fri 15 Jul
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Fri 22 Jul
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Contemporary Ceramics (CE94 Spring)

Explore and experiment with exciting ceramic processes that will teach you to realise your own design ideas in ceramic. What will you learn on this course? In these weekly two hour classes you will explore and experiment with a variety of clay working processes that will take you on a journey through the construction, decoration and realisation of your design ideas in ceramic. Your tutor will demonstrate a range of hand building techniques such as throwing, coiling and slab building, which you can choose to use by combining these processes or simply focusing on a chosen method that suits your design. You will also learn how to apply surface treatments in clay such as relief details and engraved pattern work that can be used to decorate your work. An introduction to the use of coloured slips, glazes and various glaze techniques and approaches will allow for further experimentation in the final stages of the decorating process. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kiln. The tutor will give whole class demonstrations of the various techniques in the early stages of the course and then individual, specialist guidance will be given on your projects as and when it’s needed. On completion of this course you will have gained a variety of practical skills and techniques in ceramics through the development of individual pieces or a collection of work. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults and young people aged 18+ years. It is open to learners of all levels. You don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be a charge for clay and firing of any oversized work, please refer to the tutor for guidance. Who teaches this course? Wendy Tournay

Thu 13 Jan

£186 (£169)

Thu 20 Jan

£186 (£169)

Thu 27 Jan

£186 (£169)

Thu 3 Feb

£186 (£169)

Thu 10 Feb

£186 (£169)

Thu 17 Feb

£186 (£169)

Thu 3 Mar

£186 (£169)

Thu 10 Mar

£186 (£169)

Thu 17 Mar

£186 (£169)

Thu 24 Mar

£186 (£169)

Thu 31 Mar

£186 (£169)

Thu 7 Apr

£186 (£169)

Contemporary Ceramics (CE94 Summer)

Explore and experiment with exciting ceramic processes that will teach you to realise your own design ideas in ceramic. What will you learn on this course? In these weekly two hour classes you will explore and experiment with a variety of clay working processes that will take you on a journey through the construction, decoration and realisation of your design ideas in ceramic. Your tutor will demonstrate a range of hand building techniques such as throwing, coiling and slab building, which you can choose to use by combining these processes or simply focusing on a chosen method that suits your design. You will also learn how to apply surface treatments in clay such as relief details and engraved pattern work that can be used to decorate your work. An introduction to the use of coloured slips, glazes and various glaze techniques and approaches will allow for further experimentation in the final stages of the decorating process. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kiln. The tutor will give whole class demonstrations of the various techniques in the early stages of the course and then individual, specialist guidance will be given on your projects as and when it’s needed. On completion of this course you will have gained a variety of practical skills and techniques in ceramics through the development of individual pieces or a collection of work. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults and young people aged 18+ years. It is open to learners of all levels. You don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be a charge for clay and firing of any oversized work, please refer to the tutor for guidance. Who teaches this course? Wendy Tournay

Thu 28 Apr

£176 (£159)

Thu 5 May

£176 (£159)

Thu 12 May

£176 (£159)

Thu 19 May

£176 (£159)

Thu 26 May

£176 (£159)

Thu 9 Jun

£176 (£159)

Thu 16 Jun

£176 (£159)

Thu 23 Jun

£176 (£159)

Thu 30 Jun

£176 (£159)

Thu 7 Jul

£176 (£159)

Thu 14 Jul

£176 (£159)

Thu 21 Jul

£176 (£159)

Contemporary Dance (DA09 Spring)

An introductory class with an emphasis on the Cunningham technique which is designed to create strength and flexibility of movement. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn contemporary dance techniques establishing a technical base while nurturing your creative skills. This is a technique class based on learning short exercises and phrases of movement that will progress and increase in content over the term. There will be opportunities to explore partner work and simple group work. You will improve your body and spatial awareness, develop your confidence as a dancer and have opportunities for self-expression through improvisation. There is also a short creative element to the course which the tutor will guide participants through giving you an understanding of a creative devising process. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. It is open to beginners and improvers and the class will be adapted to suit the needs of the participants. For those with more experience the technique will be made harder, and for beginners full instruction is given and the movement routines will be simplified. The course is accessible for people with disabilities providing you are physically able to dance. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Contemporary Dance is a high impact physical activity. You need a good level of physical fitness but the course is also a good way to improve your overall fitness levels. If you have any health conditions you should consult your doctor before joining this class. Do you need to bring anything? Participants will need to bring a water based drink to every session and wear suitable clothing that allows free movement. You should bring a warmer top to put on after the session. Lessons are usually done bare footed but on occasion socks may be required. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs Who teaches this course? Helen Mason

Mon 10 Jan
Performance Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 17 Jan
Performance Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 24 Jan
Performance Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 31 Jan
Performance Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 7 Feb
Performance Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 14 Feb
Performance Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 28 Feb
Performance Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 7 Mar
Performance Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 14 Mar
Performance Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 21 Mar
Performance Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 28 Mar
Performance Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 4 Apr
Performance Studio

£118 (£107)

Contemporary Dance (DA09 Summer)

An introductory class with an emphasis on the Cunningham technique which is designed to create strength and flexibility of movement. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn contemporary dance techniques establishing a technical base while nurturing your creative skills. This is a technique class based on learning short exercises and phrases of movement that will progress and increase in content over the term. There will be opportunities to explore partner work and simple group work. You will improve your body and spatial awareness, develop your confidence as a dancer and have opportunities for self-expression through improvisation. There is also a short creative element to the course which the tutor will guide participants through giving you an understanding of a creative devising process. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. It is open to beginners and improvers and the class will be adapted to suit the needs of the participants. For those with more experience the technique will be made harder, and for beginners full instruction is given and the movement routines will be simplified. The course is accessible for people with disabilities providing you are physically able to dance. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Contemporary Dance is a high impact physical activity. You need a good level of physical fitness but the course is also a good way to improve your overall fitness levels. If you have any health conditions you should consult your doctor before joining this class. Do you need to bring anything? Participants will need to bring a water based drink to every session and wear suitable clothing that allows free movement. You should bring a warmer top to put on after the session. Lessons are usually done bare footed but on occasion socks may be required. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs Who teaches this course? Helen Mason

Mon 25 Apr
Performance Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 2 May
Performance Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 9 May
Performance Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 16 May
Performance Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 23 May
Performance Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 6 Jun
Performance Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 13 Jun
Performance Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 20 Jun
Performance Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 27 Jun
Performance Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 4 Jul
Performance Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 11 Jul
Performance Studio

£118 (£107)

Mon 18 Jul
Performance Studio

£118 (£107)

Contemporary Portraiture (VA13 Spring)

Working directly from a life model, explore traditional and contemporary portraiture. What will you learn on this course? This is a flexible course for students interested in contemporary approaches to drawing and painting portraits. You will learn drawing and painting skills including measurement, proportion, line, tone and colour. You will have the opportunity to explore the use of different art materials such as pencils, charcoal, pastels, acrylic paint and watercolour. You will work directly from a clothed professional life model. We employ a range of different male and female models for our life drawing and painting courses. We usually have the same models sit for two consecutive weeks. The artist tutor gives each student individual attention, according to their experience, aptitude and specific goals, supporting them to find their own creative direction. For beginners, and others who wish to follow it, there is a weekly structured course consisting of group projects. The tutor will demonstrate a basic art material technique, show examples of his own or other artists’ work and support students as they try the technique themselves. Students may also spend time developing a particular approach. More experienced students, or those returning to the course, are welcome to undertake their own projects with the knowledge that a professional artist tutor is available to offer input and support in reaching your goals. These sessions are an excellent opportunity to further your individual drawing and painting in response to a life model. Gaining an insight into how the human form can be a fascinating ongoing topic for artistic study in its own right.
This class includes a short break. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open students of all levels. Everyone will be assisted individually based on their existing experience. It is expected that most students will have some general experience of drawing, even if they are beginners at portraiture. However this course can be used as a refresher for basic drawing techniques with reference to a portrait model. Returners are welcome to initiate their own projects with tutor support and feedback as required. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as the room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? The painting and drawing studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day. MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own expense. Who teaches this course? Paul Bartlett

Thu 13 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Thu 20 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Thu 27 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Thu 3 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Thu 10 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Thu 17 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Thu 3 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Thu 10 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Thu 17 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Thu 24 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Thu 31 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Thu 7 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Contemporary Portraiture (VA13 Summer)

Working directly from a life model, explore traditional and contemporary portraiture. What will you learn on this course? This is a flexible course for students interested in contemporary approaches to drawing and painting portraits. You will learn drawing and painting skills including measurement, proportion, line, tone and colour. You will have the opportunity to explore the use of different art materials such as pencils, charcoal, pastels, acrylic paint and watercolour. You will work directly from a clothed professional life model. We employ a range of different male and female models for our life drawing and painting courses. We usually have the same models sit for two consecutive weeks. The artist tutor gives each student individual attention, according to their experience, aptitude and specific goals, supporting them to find their own creative direction. For beginners, and others who wish to follow it, there is a weekly structured course consisting of group projects. The tutor will demonstrate a basic art material technique, show examples of his own or other artists’ work and support students as they try the technique themselves. Students may also spend time developing a particular approach. More experienced students, or those returning to the course, are welcome to undertake their own projects with the knowledge that a professional artist tutor is available to offer input and support in reaching your goals. These sessions are an excellent opportunity to further your individual drawing and painting in response to a life model. Gaining an insight into how the human form can be a fascinating ongoing topic for artistic study in its own right.
This class includes a short break. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open students of all levels. Everyone will be assisted individually based on their existing experience. It is expected that most students will have some general experience of drawing, even if they are beginners at portraiture. However this course can be used as a refresher for basic drawing techniques with reference to a portrait model. Returners are welcome to initiate their own projects with tutor support and feedback as required. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as the room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? The painting and drawing studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day. MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own expense. Who teaches this course? Paul Bartlett

Thu 28 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Thu 5 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Thu 12 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Thu 19 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Thu 26 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Thu 9 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Thu 16 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Thu 23 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Thu 30 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Thu 7 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Thu 14 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Thu 21 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Creative Drama (CH05 Spring)

Unlock your creative imagination and watch your confidence grow while exploring the wide world of drama! What will you learn on this course? On this weekly course, children will learn to embrace and develop their creativity while learning various dramatic principles, theatre and puppetry elements. The first step consists in creating a tight group where young people will feel comfortable exploring their imagination and growing their performance skills through fun exercises and theatre games. The main aim of this course is developing a set of skills that can be used both inside and outside the theatre studio. Skills such as improvisation, movement, problem solving, group work, and public speaking will grow confidence and have a long-lasting impact in young peoples’ lives. The tutor works closely with the group in order to create a happy safe space while also providing a stimulus for the playful exploration of ideas. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for children aged 5 to 9 years. It is open to beginners and improvers levels. Beginners will be introduced to a range of drama techniques and processes and improvers will have the opportunity to develop their existing skills and increase their confidence as performers. Parents are not expected to accompany children on this course. All our staff are DBS checked. Elements of this class are quite physically demanding. The course may be accessible for children with disabilities. We provide a learning support worker and a parent or carer may assist their child if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your particular needs. Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to. Do you need to bring anything? Participants should bring bottled water or a water based drink. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs for this course. Who teaches this course? Ana Petrovici

Sat 15 Jan
Randle Studio
Sat 22 Jan
Randle Studio
Sat 29 Jan
Randle Studio
Sat 5 Feb
Randle Studio
Sat 12 Feb
Randle Studio
Sat 19 Feb
Randle Studio
Sat 5 Mar
Randle Studio
Sat 12 Mar
Randle Studio
Sat 19 Mar
Randle Studio
Sat 26 Mar
Randle Studio
Sat 2 Apr
Randle Studio
Sat 9 Apr
Randle Studio

Creative Drama (CH05 Summer)

Unlock your creative imagination and watch your confidence grow while exploring the wide world of drama! What will you learn on this course? On this weekly course, children will learn to embrace and develop their creativity while learning various dramatic principles, theatre and puppetry elements. The first step consists in creating a tight group where young people will feel comfortable exploring their imagination and growing their performance skills through fun exercises and theatre games. The main aim of this course is developing a set of skills that can be used both inside and outside the theatre studio. Skills such as improvisation, movement, problem solving, group work, and public speaking will grow confidence and have a long-lasting impact in young peoples’ lives. The tutor works closely with the group in order to create a happy safe space while also providing a stimulus for the playful exploration of ideas. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for children aged 5 to 9 years. It is open to beginners and improvers levels. Beginners will be introduced to a range of drama techniques and processes and improvers will have the opportunity to develop their existing skills and increase their confidence as performers. Parents are not expected to accompany children on this course. All our staff are DBS checked. Elements of this class are quite physically demanding. The course may be accessible for children with disabilities. We provide a learning support worker and a parent or carer may assist their child if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your particular needs. Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to. Do you need to bring anything? Participants should bring bottled water or a water based drink. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs for this course. Who teaches this course? Ana Petrovici

Sat 30 Apr
Randle Studio
Sat 7 May
Randle Studio
Sat 14 May
Randle Studio
Sat 21 May
Randle Studio
Sat 28 May
Randle Studio
Sat 11 Jun
Randle Studio
Sat 18 Jun
Randle Studio
Sat 25 Jun
Randle Studio
Sat 2 Jul
Randle Studio
Sat 9 Jul
Randle Studio
Sat 16 Jul
Randle Studio
Sat 23 Jul
Randle Studio

Creative Writing Beginners (WR10 Spring)

A creative writing short course for beginners or those with low confidence. Supported by tutor Carol Preston, you'll use writing techniques to generate ideas and explore some of the genres in creative writing that you can choose to take home and develop further or share wider.

What will you learn on this course?

This course is designed to kick-start you into writing creatively. You will be taught how to generate material using writing techniques such as Free Writing and Clustering. By examining the work of published writers you will learn about techniques such as:

Writers’ ‘hook’ Use of place Archetypes Diary writing Poetic writing Film premise Characterisation

You will be encouraged to develop some of these techniques in your own writing and explore the idea that writing is a process for continued development in order that you feel motivated to continue your work at home. The course may involve some group work and collaborative writing and students will have the opportunity to share their work and receive feedback.

By the end of the course everyone will have several pieces of their own writing which have been generated in response to tutor topics and techniques along with hand-outs on these topics for further consideration and development.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners. Previous experience in creative writing is not required as full instruction will be given. This course is also suitable for anyone who lacks confidence in their writing or hasn’t written creatively for a while.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities who engage in writing activities. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring a notebook and a pen.

Are there any additional costs?

There are no additional costs apart from your preferred writing materials. Who teaches this course? Carol Preston

Mon 10 Jan
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 17 Jan
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 24 Jan
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 31 Jan
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 7 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 14 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 28 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 7 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 14 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 21 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 28 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 4 Apr
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Creative Writing Beginners (WR10 Summer)

A creative writing short course for beginners or those with low confidence. Supported by tutor Carol Preston, you'll use writing techniques to generate ideas and explore some of the genres in creative writing that you can choose to take home and develop further or share wider.

What will you learn on this course?

This course is designed to kick-start you into writing creatively. You will be taught how to generate material using writing techniques such as Free Writing and Clustering. By examining the work of published writers you will learn about techniques such as:

Writers’ ‘hook’ Use of place Archetypes Diary writing Poetic writing Film premise Characterisation

You will be encouraged to develop some of these techniques in your own writing and explore the idea that writing is a process for continued development in order that you feel motivated to continue your work at home. The course may involve some group work and collaborative writing and students will have the opportunity to share their work and receive feedback.

By the end of the course everyone will have several pieces of their own writing which have been generated in response to tutor topics and techniques along with hand-outs on these topics for further consideration and development.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners. Previous experience in creative writing is not required as full instruction will be given. This course is also suitable for anyone who lacks confidence in their writing or hasn’t written creatively for a while.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities who engage in writing activities. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring a notebook and a pen.

Are there any additional costs?

There are no additional costs apart from your preferred writing materials. Who teaches this course? Carol Preston

Mon 25 Apr
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 2 May
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 9 May
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 16 May
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 23 May
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 6 Jun
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 13 Jun
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 20 Jun
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 27 Jun
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 4 Jul
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 11 Jul
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 18 Jul
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Creative Writing Beginners (WR105 Spring)

A creative writing short course for beginners or those with low confidence. Supported by tutor Carol Preston, you'll use writing techniques to generate ideas and explore some of the genres in creative writing that you can choose to take home and develop further or share wider.

What will you learn on this course?

This course is designed to kick-start you into writing creatively. You will be taught how to generate material using writing techniques such as Free Writing and Clustering. By examining the work of published writers you will learn about techniques such as:

Writers’ ‘hook’ Use of place Archetypes Diary writing Poetic writing Film premise Characterisation

You will be encouraged to develop some of these techniques in your own writing and explore the idea that writing is a process for continued development in order that you feel motivated to continue your work at home. The course may involve some group work and collaborative writing and students will have the opportunity to share their work and receive feedback.

By the end of the course everyone will have several pieces of their own writing which have been generated in response to tutor topics and techniques along with hand-outs on these topics for further consideration and development.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners. Previous experience in creative writing is not required as full instruction will be given. This course is also suitable for anyone who lacks confidence in their writing or hasn’t written creatively for a while.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities who engage in writing activities. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring a notebook and a pen.

Are there any additional costs?

There are no additional costs apart from your preferred writing materials. Who teaches this course? Carol Preston

Tue 11 Jan
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 18 Jan
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 25 Jan
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 1 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 8 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 15 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 1 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 8 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 15 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 22 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 29 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 5 Apr
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Creative Writing Beginners (WR105 Summer)

A creative writing short course for beginners or those with low confidence. Supported by tutor Carol Preston, you'll use writing techniques to generate ideas and explore some of the genres in creative writing that you can choose to take home and develop further or share wider.

What will you learn on this course?

This course is designed to kick-start you into writing creatively. You will be taught how to generate material using writing techniques such as Free Writing and Clustering. By examining the work of published writers you will learn about techniques such as:

Writers’ ‘hook’ Use of place Archetypes Diary writing Poetic writing Film premise Characterisation

You will be encouraged to develop some of these techniques in your own writing and explore the idea that writing is a process for continued development in order that you feel motivated to continue your work at home. The course may involve some group work and collaborative writing and students will have the opportunity to share their work and receive feedback.

By the end of the course everyone will have several pieces of their own writing which have been generated in response to tutor topics and techniques along with hand-outs on these topics for further consideration and development.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners. Previous experience in creative writing is not required as full instruction will be given. This course is also suitable for anyone who lacks confidence in their writing or hasn’t written creatively for a while.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities who engage in writing activities. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring a notebook and a pen.

Are there any additional costs?

There are no additional costs apart from your preferred writing materials. Who teaches this course? Carol Preston

Tue 26 Apr
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 3 May
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 10 May
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 17 May
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 24 May
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 7 Jun
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 14 Jun
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 21 Jun
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 28 Jun
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 5 Jul
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 12 Jul
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 19 Jul
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Creative Writing Improvers (WR107 Spring)

Advance your writing, re-drafting and editing skills whilst gaining an understanding of how to become your own self-critic for continued development.

What will you learn on this course?

This course is aimed at existing writers who are engaged in creative writing activities, creating new work or developing existing projects. By examining the work of published writers we will look at the following techniques in depth:

Writers’ ‘hook’ Use of place Archetypes Diary writing Poetic writing Film premise Characterisation

This will include consideration of in-depth character, motives, conflict and the examination of themes in writing. There will also be a focus on the re-drafting and editing process, crucial to all writers. Learners will develop an understanding of how to become their own self-critic and appreciate that writing is a process for continued development.

The course may involve some group work and collaborative writing and students will have the opportunity to share their work and receive feedback.

By the end of the course everyone will have a small portfolio of their own writing which can be extended, re-drafted and edited for their own purposes.

Who is this course for?

This short course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to improvers. Previous experience of creative writing is required. You may have attended MAC’s Creative Writing Beginners course or a similar course elsewhere. This course may also be suitable for those working in a creative environment such as marketing or advertising agencies.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can engage in writing activities. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring a notebook and a pen.

Are there any additional costs?

There are no additional costs apart from your preferred writing materials. Who teaches this course? Carol Preston

Tue 11 Jan
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 18 Jan
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 25 Jan
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 1 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 8 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 15 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 1 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 8 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 15 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 22 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 29 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 5 Apr
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Creative Writing Improvers (WR107 Summer)

Advance your writing, re-drafting and editing skills whilst gaining an understanding of how to become your own self-critic for continued development.

What will you learn on this course?

This course is aimed at existing writers who are engaged in creative writing activities, creating new work or developing existing projects. By examining the work of published writers we will look at the following techniques in depth:

Writers’ ‘hook’ Use of place Archetypes Diary writing Poetic writing Film premise Characterisation

This will include consideration of in-depth character, motives, conflict and the examination of themes in writing. There will also be a focus on the re-drafting and editing process, crucial to all writers. Learners will develop an understanding of how to become their own self-critic and appreciate that writing is a process for continued development.

The course may involve some group work and collaborative writing and students will have the opportunity to share their work and receive feedback.

By the end of the course everyone will have a small portfolio of their own writing which can be extended, re-drafted and edited for their own purposes.

Who is this course for?

This short course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to improvers. Previous experience of creative writing is required. You may have attended MAC’s Creative Writing Beginners course or a similar course elsewhere. This course may also be suitable for those working in a creative environment such as marketing or advertising agencies.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can engage in writing activities. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring a notebook and a pen.

Are there any additional costs?

There are no additional costs apart from your preferred writing materials. Who teaches this course? Carol Preston

Tue 26 Apr
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 3 May
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 10 May
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 17 May
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 24 May
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 7 Jun
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 14 Jun
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 21 Jun
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 28 Jun
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 5 Jul
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 12 Jul
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Tue 19 Jul
Pinsent Mason 2

£82 (£74)

Creative Writing Improvers (WR11 Spring)

Advance your writing, re-drafting and editing skills whilst gaining an understanding of how to become your own self-critic for continued development.

What will you learn on this course?

This course is aimed at existing writers who are engaged in creative writing activities, creating new work or developing existing projects. By examining the work of published writers we will look at the following techniques in depth:

Writers’ ‘hook’ Use of place Archetypes Diary writing Poetic writing Film premise Characterisation

This will include consideration of in-depth character, motives, conflict and the examination of themes in writing. There will also be a focus on the re-drafting and editing process, crucial to all writers. Learners will develop an understanding of how to become their own self-critic and appreciate that writing is a process for continued development.

The course may involve some group work and collaborative writing and students will have the opportunity to share their work and receive feedback.

By the end of the course everyone will have a small portfolio of their own writing which can be extended, re-drafted and edited for their own purposes.

Who is this course for?

This short course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to improvers. Previous experience of creative writing is required. You may have attended MAC’s Creative Writing Beginners course or a similar course elsewhere. This course may also be suitable for those working in a creative environment such as marketing or advertising agencies.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can engage in writing activities. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring a notebook and a pen.

Are there any additional costs?

There are no additional costs apart from your preferred writing materials. Who teaches this course? Carol Preston

Mon 10 Jan
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 17 Jan
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 24 Jan
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 31 Jan
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 7 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 14 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 28 Feb
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 7 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 14 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 21 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 28 Mar
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 4 Apr
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Creative Writing Improvers (WR11 Summer)

Advance your writing, re-drafting and editing skills whilst gaining an understanding of how to become your own self-critic for continued development.

What will you learn on this course?

This course is aimed at existing writers who are engaged in creative writing activities, creating new work or developing existing projects. By examining the work of published writers we will look at the following techniques in depth:

Writers’ ‘hook’ Use of place Archetypes Diary writing Poetic writing Film premise Characterisation

This will include consideration of in-depth character, motives, conflict and the examination of themes in writing. There will also be a focus on the re-drafting and editing process, crucial to all writers. Learners will develop an understanding of how to become their own self-critic and appreciate that writing is a process for continued development.

The course may involve some group work and collaborative writing and students will have the opportunity to share their work and receive feedback.

By the end of the course everyone will have a small portfolio of their own writing which can be extended, re-drafted and edited for their own purposes.

Who is this course for?

This short course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to improvers. Previous experience of creative writing is required. You may have attended MAC’s Creative Writing Beginners course or a similar course elsewhere. This course may also be suitable for those working in a creative environment such as marketing or advertising agencies.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can engage in writing activities. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring a notebook and a pen.

Are there any additional costs?

There are no additional costs apart from your preferred writing materials. Who teaches this course? Carol Preston

Mon 25 Apr
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 2 May
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 9 May
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 16 May
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 23 May
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 6 Jun
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 13 Jun
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 20 Jun
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 27 Jun
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 4 Jul
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 11 Jul
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Mon 18 Jul
Pinsent Mason 2

£98 (£89)

Dance for Wellbeing (DA25 Spring)

A weekly dance class for older adults who want to start dancing and moving for improved health and wellbeing.

What will you learn on this course? This fun weekly course will focus on contemporary dance and improvised movement techniques as well as providing some time to socialise and meet new people. This course should contribute to improvements in your general fitness and wellbeing including: General mobility Core strength Posture and alignment Confidence Wellbeing The class will include an improvised warm up followed by technique exercises. There will be the opportunity to improvise your own movement finding positions and shapes that suit your body and ability. There will also be the chance to work creatively with other members of the group.

The tutor will nurture a supportive and social environment for the class, encouraging and challenging based on individual’s abilities and needs.

On completing this course you should feel able to be more confidently agile in your everyday lives, have greater motivation for exercise and improved sense of wellbeing.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 40+ years who would like to spend time socialising and learning to dance. It is open to all levels. Suitable for complete beginners who have never stepped foot on a dance floor to those who have a little experience and would like to learn more. Everyone will be encouraged to participate at their own pace.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities. A support worker or carer may assist and all classes are planned to meet the specific needs of the group. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible.

Any health issues should be declared by participants at the start of the course and will be taken into consideration by the tutor. Exercises will be adapted where necessary and chairs will be available for participants to rest if needed. Do you need to bring anything? Please wear suitable clothing that allows free movement and shoes with a non-slip sole. Also bring a water based drink.

Are there any additional costs?

There are no additional costs Who teaches this course? Sandra Golding

Wed 12 Jan
English Studio

£115 (£104)

Wed 19 Jan
English Studio

£115 (£104)

Wed 26 Jan
English Studio

£115 (£104)

Wed 2 Feb
English Studio

£115 (£104)

Wed 9 Feb
English Studio

£115 (£104)

Wed 16 Feb
English Studio

£115 (£104)

Wed 2 Mar
English Studio

£115 (£104)

Wed 9 Mar
English Studio

£115 (£104)

Wed 16 Mar
English Studio

£115 (£104)

Wed 23 Mar
English Studio

£115 (£104)

Wed 30 Mar
English Studio

£115 (£104)

Wed 6 Apr
English Studio

£115 (£104)

Dance for Wellbeing (DA25 Summer)

A weekly dance class for older adults who want to start dancing and moving for improved health and wellbeing.

What will you learn on this course? This fun weekly course will focus on contemporary dance and improvised movement techniques as well as providing some time to socialise and meet new people. This course should contribute to improvements in your general fitness and wellbeing including: General mobility Core strength Posture and alignment Confidence Wellbeing The class will include an improvised warm up followed by technique exercises. There will be the opportunity to improvise your own movement finding positions and shapes that suit your body and ability. There will also be the chance to work creatively with other members of the group.

The tutor will nurture a supportive and social environment for the class, encouraging and challenging based on individual’s abilities and needs.

On completing this course you should feel able to be more confidently agile in your everyday lives, have greater motivation for exercise and improved sense of wellbeing.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 40+ years who would like to spend time socialising and learning to dance. It is open to all levels. Suitable for complete beginners who have never stepped foot on a dance floor to those who have a little experience and would like to learn more. Everyone will be encouraged to participate at their own pace.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities. A support worker or carer may assist and all classes are planned to meet the specific needs of the group. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible.

Any health issues should be declared by participants at the start of the course and will be taken into consideration by the tutor. Exercises will be adapted where necessary and chairs will be available for participants to rest if needed. Do you need to bring anything? Please wear suitable clothing that allows free movement and shoes with a non-slip sole. Also bring a water based drink.

Are there any additional costs?

There are no additional costs Who teaches this course? Sandra Golding

Wed 27 Apr
English Studio

£115 (£104)

Wed 4 May
English Studio

£115 (£104)

Wed 11 May
English Studio

£115 (£104)

Wed 18 May
English Studio

£115 (£104)

Wed 25 May
English Studio

£115 (£104)

Wed 8 Jun
English Studio

£115 (£104)

Wed 15 Jun
English Studio

£115 (£104)

Wed 22 Jun
English Studio

£115 (£104)

Wed 29 Jun
English Studio

£115 (£104)

Wed 6 Jul
English Studio

£115 (£104)

Wed 13 Jul
English Studio

£115 (£104)

Wed 20 Jul
English Studio

£115 (£104)

Design, Make and Sell your Jewellery (JE105 Spring)

Join us on this course designed to help jewellery makers with experience make money from their designs. What will you learn on this course? This is a 12 week course aimed at Jewellery makers with experience who want to earn money from their designs and are not sure where to start. Each week we will cover a specific topic including pricing and selling your work alongside working on your own designs with full support of the jewellery tutor. By the end of the course participants will have the skills and knowledge to turn their hobby into a business. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+. It is suitable for advanced level students who are experienced in jewellery making. The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dexterity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair accessible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor. You will need to purchase materials for the jewellery you wish to make as below. MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own if they have them to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from MAC individually or in packs e.g. Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades) Silver - £1.30 per gram 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10 Saw blades (x12) - £2.60 Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet Who teaches this course? Vanessa Miller

Fri 14 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£179 (£162)

Fri 21 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£179 (£162)

Fri 28 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£179 (£162)

Fri 4 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£179 (£162)

Fri 11 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£179 (£162)

Fri 18 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£179 (£162)

Fri 4 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£179 (£162)

Fri 11 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£179 (£162)

Fri 18 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£179 (£162)

Fri 25 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£179 (£162)

Fri 1 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£179 (£162)

Fri 8 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£179 (£162)

Design, Make and Sell your Jewellery (JE105 Summer)

Join us on this course designed to help jewellery makers with experience make money from their designs. What will you learn on this course? This is a 12 week course aimed at Jewellery makers with experience who want to earn money from their designs and are not sure where to start. Each week we will cover a specific topic including pricing and selling your work alongside working on your own designs with full support of the jewellery tutor. By the end of the course participants will have the skills and knowledge to turn their hobby into a business. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+. It is suitable for advanced level students who are experienced in jewellery making. The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dexterity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair accessible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor. You will need to purchase materials for the jewellery you wish to make as below. MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own if they have them to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from MAC individually or in packs e.g. Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades) Silver - £1.30 per gram 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10 Saw blades (x12) - £2.60 Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet Who teaches this course? Vanessa Miller

Fri 29 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£179 (£162)

Fri 6 May
Jewellery Studio

£179 (£162)

Fri 13 May
Jewellery Studio

£179 (£162)

Fri 20 May
Jewellery Studio

£179 (£162)

Fri 27 May
Jewellery Studio

£179 (£162)

Fri 10 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£179 (£162)

Fri 17 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£179 (£162)

Fri 24 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£179 (£162)

Fri 1 Jul
Jewellery Studio

£179 (£162)

Fri 8 Jul
Jewellery Studio

£179 (£162)

Fri 15 Jul
Jewellery Studio

£179 (£162)

Fri 22 Jul
Jewellery Studio

£179 (£162)

Digital Kids Club (CH101 Spring)

Learn to design, code and build digital art projects in this Saturday morning 6 week club. The club will run on alternate weeks allowing children time to work on their projects in between sessions.

What will you learn on this course?

This course will introduce you to working creatively with electronics using microprocessors such as Arduino’s, microbits and raspberry pis and LED’s. Each session the tutor will introduce a project for the children to work on that will combine arts and crafts with coding and basic electronics and simple circuits. The course will run on alternate Saturdays, designed so that the children can work on their projects in between sessions.

This course is taught by tutor Catherine Jones who is a practicing artist with extensive experience and strong links in the entertainment and creative industry. Using a combination of practical design demonstrations and 1-2-1 support you will receive guidance tailored to your individual projects and needs.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for young people aged 6 to 11 years. It is open to all ability levels and children don’t need previous experience. Parents are not expected to accompany their children on these courses. All our staff are DBS checked.

The course may be accessible for children with disabilities who can participate in detail based activities. We provide a learning support worker and a parent or carer may assist their child if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The building is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs.

Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to.

Do you need to bring anything? Basic art materials, microprocessors, LED’s and laptops will be provided for the children to experiment during the sessions. Children are welcome to bring along their own raspberry pi’s microbits and Arduino’s so that they can then take their projects home and continue to work on them in between sessions. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The tutor will suggest sources for parents to buy kit on request. Who teaches this course? Catherine Jones

Sat 15 Jan
Media Studio

Children £73

Sat 22 Jan
Media Studio

Children £73

Sat 29 Jan
Media Studio

Children £73

Sat 5 Feb
Media Studio

Children £73

Sat 12 Feb
Media Studio

Children £73

Sat 19 Feb
Media Studio

Children £73

Sat 5 Mar
Media Studio

Children £73

Sat 12 Mar
Media Studio

Children £73

Sat 19 Mar
Media Studio

Children £73

Sat 26 Mar
Media Studio

Children £73

Sat 2 Apr
Media Studio

Children £73

Sat 9 Apr
Media Studio

Children £73

Digital Kids Club (CH101 Summer)

Learn to design, code and build digital art projects in this Saturday morning 6 week club. The club will run on alternate weeks allowing children time to work on their projects in between sessions. What will you learn on this course? This course will introduce you to working creatively with electronics using microprocessors such as Arduino’s, microbits and raspberry pis and LED’s. Each session the tutor will introduce a project for the children to work on that will combine arts and crafts with coding and basic electronics and simple circuits. The course will run on alternate Saturdays, designed so that the children can work on their projects in between sessions. This course is taught by tutor Catherine Jones who is a practicing artist with extensive experience and strong links in the entertainment and creative industry. Using a combination of practical design demonstrations and 1-2-1 support you will receive guidance tailored to your individual projects and needs. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for young people aged 6 to 11 years. It is open to all ability levels and children don’t need previous experience. Parents are not expected to accompany their children on these courses. All our staff are DBS checked. The course may be accessible for children with disabilities who can participate in detail based activities. We provide a learning support worker and a parent or carer may assist their child if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The building is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to. Do you need to bring anything? Basic art materials, microprocessors, LED’s and laptops will be provided for the children to experiment during the sessions. Children are welcome to bring along their own raspberry pi’s microbits and Arduino’s so that they can then take their projects home and continue to work on them in between sessions. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The tutor will suggest sources for parents to buy kit on request. Who teaches this course? Catherine Jones

Sat 30 Apr
Media Studio

Children £73

Sat 7 May
Media Studio

Children £73

Sat 14 May
Media Studio

Children £73

Sat 21 May
Media Studio

Children £73

Sat 28 May
Media Studio

Children £73

Sat 11 Jun
Media Studio

Children £73

Sat 18 Jun
Media Studio

Children £73

Sat 25 Jun
Media Studio

Children £73

Sat 2 Jul
Media Studio

Children £73

Sat 9 Jul
Media Studio

Children £73

Sat 16 Jul
Media Studio

Children £73

Sat 23 Jul
Media Studio

Children £73

Draw, Paint, Print (VA104 Spring)

On this course you will be encouraged to develop your creative skills through a range of drawing, painting and printmaking techniques. This will enable you to explore the qualities of various materials and processes whilst creating and developing a small body of work. What will you learn on this course? During this course you will make drawings using a variety of materials to record from observation, secondary source material or imagination. These drawings will then be developed with painting mediums focusing on elements such as scale, colour, composition and surface qualities. You will then have the opportunity to select a printmaking process (dry point, monoprint or collagraph) that is most suitable to your support work to develop into a final print. The course will be in the form of workshops and practical demonstrations to develop skills and the confidence to experiment. Individuals will be encouraged to develop their own individual projects. The tutor will tailor guidance to your level of experience and help you to achieve your aims for your work. There will be opportunities for group discussions. On completing this course, you should gain an understanding of how work can be developed from initial ideas into resolved pieces of creative work. You will have produced a small portfolio of practical work including drawings, paintings and prints. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners, improvers and advanced. It is suitable for people with no previous experience to those who wish to develop their portfolios to include print. The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can participate in practical creative activities. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? For one of the drawing exercises please bring secondary source material in the form of good quality photographs or other images to work from. Basic art materials will be provided but students will be expected to provide some of their own additional materials as the course progresses. MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? Any additional art materials are to be provided at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Angela Maloney

Wed 12 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Wed 19 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Wed 26 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Wed 2 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Wed 9 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Wed 16 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Wed 2 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Wed 9 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Wed 16 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Wed 23 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Wed 30 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Wed 6 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Draw, Paint, Print (VA104 Summer)

On this course you will be encouraged to develop your creative skills through a range of drawing, painting and printmaking techniques. This will enable you to explore the qualities of various materials and processes whilst creating and developing a small body of work. What will you learn on this course? During this course you will make drawings using a variety of materials to record from observation, secondary source material or imagination. These drawings will then be developed with painting mediums focusing on elements such as scale, colour, composition and surface qualities. You will then have the opportunity to select a printmaking process (dry point, monoprint or collagraph) that is most suitable to your support work to develop into a final print. The course will be in the form of workshops and practical demonstrations to develop skills and the confidence to experiment. Individuals will be encouraged to develop their own individual projects. The tutor will tailor guidance to your level of experience and help you to achieve your aims for your work. There will be opportunities for group discussions. On completing this course, you should gain an understanding of how work can be developed from initial ideas into resolved pieces of creative work. You will have produced a small portfolio of practical work including drawings, paintings and prints. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners, improvers and advanced. It is suitable for people with no previous experience to those who wish to develop their portfolios to include print. The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can participate in practical creative activities. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? For one of the drawing exercises please bring secondary source material in the form of good quality photographs or other images to work from. Basic art materials will be provided but students will be expected to provide some of their own additional materials as the course progresses. MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? Any additional art materials are to be provided at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Angela Maloney

Wed 27 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Wed 4 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Wed 11 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Wed 18 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Wed 25 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Wed 8 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Wed 15 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Wed 22 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Wed 29 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Wed 6 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Wed 13 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Wed 20 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Drawing & Painting Nature (VA84 Spring)

Using a mixture of media develop your own themes based on observation of natural forms within still–life, figure and MAC’s surrounding landscape. What will you learn on this course? On this course ‘nature’ is the starting point to stimulate curiosity and creativity while learning about drawing and painting. Through the use of direct observation and strategies for gathering reference, you will learn skills including measurement, proportion, line, tone, monochrome, limited palette and full colour. You will have the opportunity to explore the use of different art materials such as pencils, charcoal, pastels, acrylic paint, watercolour and mixed media. You will work directly from natural subjects provided by the tutor or by members of the class. Topics of study derived from these subjects may include: flowers and plants, fruit, vegetables, shells, pebbles, trees, roots, windfall branches, clouds, landscape, water, birds, animals, shadows, portrait, life drawing etc. Cannon Hill Park may also be used as a resource along with images of work by other artists. This structured course consists mainly of two week projects on each nature topic, although students may linger longer on any aspect that they wish, and some are designed to overlap. The content evolves from term to term in response to student feedback. The topics are introduced by the tutor with examples of his own or other artists’ work and practical demonstrations. Each student will receive individual attention according to their experience and need, supporting them to develop a practical understanding of art materials and a greater appreciation of aspects of nature. Advanced students are invited to participate in group projects where they wish or have tutor assistance with developing their own individual projects inspired by nature. This course aims to offer a relaxed environment, conducive to quiet concentration where students can progress with their individual creative journey. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to students of all levels. Beginners may be completely new to drawing and painting or may not have done it for some time. They will be offered an introduction to drawing and painting methods. Improvers and advanced students may have previously completed courses at MAC or elsewhere and will benefit from an opportunity for further development. They may wish to respond to tutor led activities or initiate their own nature themed projects with tutor support and feedback as required. The course is accessible for people with disabilities. The room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? The painting and drawing studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day. MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own expense. Who teaches this course? Paul Bartlett

Tue 11 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 18 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 25 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 1 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 8 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 15 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 1 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 8 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 15 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 22 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 29 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 5 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Drawing & Painting Nature (VA84 Summer)

Using a mixture of media develop your own themes based on observation of natural forms within still–life, figure and MAC’s surrounding landscape. What will you learn on this course? On this course ‘nature’ is the starting point to stimulate curiosity and creativity while learning about drawing and painting. Through the use of direct observation and strategies for gathering reference, you will learn skills including measurement, proportion, line, tone, monochrome, limited palette and full colour. You will have the opportunity to explore the use of different art materials such as pencils, charcoal, pastels, acrylic paint, watercolour and mixed media. You will work directly from natural subjects provided by the tutor or by members of the class. Topics of study derived from these subjects may include: flowers and plants, fruit, vegetables, shells, pebbles, trees, roots, windfall branches, clouds, landscape, water, birds, animals, shadows, portrait, life drawing etc. Cannon Hill Park may also be used as a resource along with images of work by other artists. This structured course consists mainly of two week projects on each nature topic, although students may linger longer on any aspect that they wish, and some are designed to overlap. The content evolves from term to term in response to student feedback. The topics are introduced by the tutor with examples of his own or other artists’ work and practical demonstrations. Each student will receive individual attention according to their experience and need, supporting them to develop a practical understanding of art materials and a greater appreciation of aspects of nature. Advanced students are invited to participate in group projects where they wish or have tutor assistance with developing their own individual projects inspired by nature. This course aims to offer a relaxed environment, conducive to quiet concentration where students can progress with their individual creative journey. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to students of all levels. Beginners may be completely new to drawing and painting or may not have done it for some time. They will be offered an introduction to drawing and painting methods. Improvers and advanced students may have previously completed courses at MAC or elsewhere and will benefit from an opportunity for further development. They may wish to respond to tutor led activities or initiate their own nature themed projects with tutor support and feedback as required. The course is accessible for people with disabilities. The room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? The painting and drawing studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day. MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own expense. Who teaches this course? Paul Bartlett

Tue 26 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 3 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 10 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 17 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 24 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 7 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 14 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 21 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 28 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 5 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 12 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Tue 19 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Drawing, Comics & Animation (YP103 Spring)

Learn how to design and create your own comic characters and story, learn drawing skills and work with 2D animation to bring your characters to life.

What will you learn on this course?

On this course you will learn how to create your own comics, short visual stories, characters and animation.

The course will cover

• Drawing skills and techniques • Character design and concepts • Creating stories and storyboards • Animation techniques such as stop motion and hand drawn animation • Pencilling and inking • Digital colouring and lettering

By exploring and studying a range of comics you will learn to understand different stylistic approaches and artistic techniques.

You will be taught how to interpret the written word into imagery and to communicate stories effectively.

The course will also consider different layouts and formats for presenting your comic including conventional comic strips, art style and display or fan art.

You will be guided through the process of creating concept art for characters and developing these in your comic. This course combines traditional pen and paper drawing skills with digital techniques and the use of comic layout software.

On completion of this course you can expect to have gained an understanding of a range of approaches to creating comics and produced your own comic art works and animation.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for young people aged 11-17 years. It is open to beginners and improvers so you don’t need previous art experience as full instruction is given. If you do have some experience the course is designed for you to explore and learn new techniques to further develop your skills.

The course is accessible for young people of all abilities who can participate in practical art activities and use a computer. We provide a learning support worker and a carer or support worker may assist if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible.

Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to.

Parents are not expected to accompany children on these courses. All our staff are DBS checked. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything as all materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs for this course. Who teaches this course? Martin McNally

Fri 14 Jan
Media Studio
Fri 21 Jan
Media Studio
Fri 28 Jan
Media Studio
Fri 4 Feb
Media Studio
Fri 11 Feb
Media Studio
Fri 18 Feb
Media Studio
Fri 4 Mar
Media Studio
Fri 11 Mar
Media Studio
Fri 18 Mar
Media Studio
Fri 25 Mar
Media Studio
Fri 1 Apr
Media Studio
Fri 8 Apr
Media Studio

Drawing, Comics & Animation (YP103 Summer)

Learn how to design and create your own comic characters and story, learn drawing skills and work with 2D animation to bring your characters to life.

What will you learn on this course?

On this course you will learn how to create your own comics, short visual stories, characters and animation.

The course will cover

• Drawing skills and techniques • Character design and concepts • Creating stories and storyboards • Animation techniques such as stop motion and hand drawn animation • Pencilling and inking • Digital colouring and lettering

By exploring and studying a range of comics you will learn to understand different stylistic approaches and artistic techniques.

You will be taught how to interpret the written word into imagery and to communicate stories effectively.

The course will also consider different layouts and formats for presenting your comic including conventional comic strips, art style and display or fan art.

You will be guided through the process of creating concept art for characters and developing these in your comic. This course combines traditional pen and paper drawing skills with digital techniques and the use of comic layout software.

On completion of this course you can expect to have gained an understanding of a range of approaches to creating comics and produced your own comic art works and animation.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for young people aged 11-17 years. It is open to beginners and improvers so you don’t need previous art experience as full instruction is given. If you do have some experience the course is designed for you to explore and learn new techniques to further develop your skills.

The course is accessible for young people of all abilities who can participate in practical art activities and use a computer. We provide a learning support worker and a carer or support worker may assist if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible.

Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to.

Parents are not expected to accompany children on these courses. All our staff are DBS checked. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything as all materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs for this course. Who teaches this course? Martin McNally

Fri 29 Apr
Media Studio
Fri 6 May
Media Studio
Fri 13 May
Media Studio
Fri 20 May
Media Studio
Fri 27 May
Media Studio
Fri 10 Jun
Media Studio
Fri 17 Jun
Media Studio
Fri 24 Jun
Media Studio
Fri 1 Jul
Media Studio
Fri 8 Jul
Media Studio
Fri 15 Jul
Media Studio
Fri 22 Jul
Media Studio

Drawing Techniques (VA03 Spring)

Develop your drawing and observational skills while exploring the art of working with graphite pencils, charcoal pencils, pastel pencils and coloured/water soluble pencils. It is an opportunity to try things out that can give satisfaction for many years to come. Students are encouraged to return to the same course so they can take each technique further. What will you learn on this course? This is a structured course that will guide you through the use of a range of pencils such as graphite pencils, charcoal pencils, pastel pencils and coloured/water soluble pencils. You will gain drawing skills in line, tone, form and colour along with measurement of proportions. You will work with a variety of intriguing subject matter chosen to facilitate specific learning goals of individual lessons. These will include; • direct observation still-life • natural forms • a life model • a portrait model • and a number of experimental projects to tap into your creative imagination. This course focusses on learning by art practice. Each week the tutor will set a specific project. He will demonstrate a basic technique supported by completed examples of artists’ work. Students will then undertake a practical exercise to learn and apply the technique themselves with individual support and guidance from the tutor. Each lesson builds on the previous one, gradually developing your skills and understanding. On completing this course you can expect to have a range of drawings of different subjects demonstrating your understanding of basic drawing techniques and the use of different types of pencil. This course aims to offer a relaxed environment, conducive to informal conversation and quiet concentration where students can progress with their individual creative journey. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is designed for students who wish to improve their drawing techniques and skills. Students with some previous drawing experience will benefit from this course and it is suitable for those wishing to start from simple beginnings, then accumulatively put together more techniques as the course progresses. The course is accessible for people with disabilities. The room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? The painting and drawing studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day. Students are encouraged to bring their own objects and still life and you may wish to bring additional art materials to work with. MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own expense. Who teaches this course? Paul Bartlett

Mon 10 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Mon 17 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Mon 24 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Mon 31 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Mon 7 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Mon 14 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Mon 28 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Mon 7 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Mon 14 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Mon 21 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Mon 28 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Mon 4 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£146 (£133)

Drawing Techniques (VA03 Summer)

Develop your drawing and observational skills while exploring the art of working with graphite pencils, charcoal pencils, pastel pencils and coloured/water soluble pencils. It is an opportunity to try things out that can give satisfaction for many years to come. Students are encouraged to return to the same course so they can take each technique further. What will you learn on this course? This is a structured course that will guide you through the use of a range of pencils such as graphite pencils, charcoal pencils, pastel pencils and coloured/water soluble pencils. You will gain drawing skills in line, tone, form and colour along with measurement of proportions. You will work with a variety of intriguing subject matter chosen to facilitate specific learning goals of individual lessons. These will include; • direct observation still-life • natural forms • a life model • a portrait model • and a number of experimental projects to tap into your creative imagination. This course focusses on learning by art practice. Each week the tutor will set a specific project. He will demonstrate a basic technique supported by completed examples of artists’ work. Students will then undertake a practical exercise to learn and apply the technique themselves with individual support and guidance from the tutor. Each lesson builds on the previous one, gradually developing your skills and understanding. On completing this course you can expect to have a range of drawings of different subjects demonstrating your understanding of basic drawing techniques and the use of different types of pencil. This course aims to offer a relaxed environment, conducive to informal conversation and quiet concentration where students can progress with their individual creative journey. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is designed for students who wish to improve their drawing techniques and skills. Students with some previous drawing experience will benefit from this course and it is suitable for those wishing to start from simple beginnings, then accumulatively put together more techniques as the course progresses. The course is accessible for people with disabilities. The room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? The painting and drawing studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day. Students are encouraged to bring their own objects and still life and you may wish to bring additional art materials to work with. MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own expense. Who teaches this course? Paul Bartlett

Mon 25 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Mon 2 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Mon 9 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Mon 16 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Mon 23 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Mon 6 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Mon 13 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Mon 20 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Mon 27 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Mon 4 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Mon 11 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Mon 18 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£136 (£123)

Drive My Car

Drive My Car
  • 2021
  • 2h 59min
  • 15
  • Directed by: Ryûsuke Hamaguchi
  • Cast: Hidetoshi Nishijima, Tôko Miura, Reika Kirishima

(Doraibu mai kâ)
Dir Ryûsuke Hamaguchi/JP 2021/179 mins/Japanese wEng ST

Hidetoshi Nishijima, Tôko Miura, Reika Kirishima

Inspired by Haruki Murakami’s short story, Ryusuke Hamaguchi takes us on an unpredictable and self-revelatory journey in this serene yet riveting drama.

Theatre director Yusuke and his TV screenwriter wife Oto have a special bond as creative partners, sharing a life punctuated by private rituals. This is shattered by a sudden incident and the appearance of Yusuke’s new chauffeur Misaki and Koji, an actor from Oto’s TV series. As the film gradually peels back the unspoken layers of their marriage, parallels form with Yusuke’s ongoing production of Chekhov’s ‘Uncle Vanya’. As the title infers, much of the film takes place while driving, with Yusuke’s old red Saab becoming centre stage for the protagonists to reveal their innermost truths. Hamaguchi and Takamasa Oe’s immaculate script, though visually austere, keeps us on the edge of our seat throughout, eagerly anticipating the next epiphany. This is an intense and sensorially rich film, sustained by great performances and bold long takes. Thoroughly engrossing across its three-hour duration, Drive My Car shows us how intimate silences can amplify the truth and become part of the intricate evolution of a life story.

Sat 18 Dec
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Sun 19 Dec
Cinema

£8–£10.25

The Electrical Life of Louis Wain

The Electrical Life of Louis Wain
  • 2021
  • UK / US
  • 1h 51min
  • 12A
  • Directed by: Will Sharpe
  • Cast: Benedict Cumberbatch, Claire Foy, Andrea Riseborough, Toby Jones

The extraordinary true story of eccentric British artist Louis Wain (Benedict Cumberbatch), whose playful, sometimes even psychedelic pictures helped to transform the public's perception of cats forever. Moving from the late 1800s through to the 1930s, we follow the incredible adventures of this inspiring, unsung hero, as he seeks to unlock the ‘electrical’ mysteries of the world and, in so doing, to better understand his own life and the profound love he shared with his wife Emily Richardson (Claire Foy).

Fri 14 Jan
Cinema

£5

Sat 15 Jan
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Sun 16 Jan
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Mon 17 Jan
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Tue 18 Jan
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Wed 19 Jan
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Thu 20 Jan
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Explore Ceramic Forms and Surface Decoration (CE11 Spring)

A course for ceramics students to develop hand building construction techniques and explore surface decoration through pattern and texture. What will you learn on this course? This course offers ceramics students the opportunity to develop your construction techniques through hand building, and explore the relationship of surface decoration through pattern and texture. You will have the opportunity to use a variety of techniques, including sgraffito, paper resist and in-relief modelling. The course will cover the following skills and techniques: Recording and documenting of ideas Development of 2d designs into 3d objects Construction techniques Visualising the 3D form Surface decorating techniques Creating precise repeat patterns Compositional aesthetic History of ceramic art context Brush on glazing In addition, there will be opportunity to discuss ideas and intentions with the group and you will receive support in developing your own independent artistic style. The tutor will develop a guided programme of study with the group providing demonstrations and one-to-one support as required. You are encouraged to develop your own ideas within the parameters of creating hand-built pots with surface decoration. Use of a personal sketchbook is encouraged throughout this course, to enable the development of ideas, and of the student’s own working style. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, glazes, all necessary tools and the firing kiln. On completion of this course you will have broadened your ceramics skills and learned new techniques for the realisation of your own design for a hand-built pot with surface decoration. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to all levels. Learners will be introduced to this subject whilst Improvers and advanced students will be guided in their projects, The course is accessible for people with disabilities who have the relevant ceramics experience and a support worker or carer may assist if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note there is a charge for clay and firing of oversized work, please refer to the tutor for guidance. Who teaches this course? Emily-Kriste Wilcox

Wed 12 Jan

£182 (£164)

Wed 19 Jan

£182 (£164)

Wed 26 Jan

£182 (£164)

Wed 2 Feb

£182 (£164)

Wed 9 Feb

£182 (£164)

Wed 16 Feb

£182 (£164)

Wed 2 Mar

£182 (£164)

Wed 9 Mar

£182 (£164)

Wed 16 Mar

£182 (£164)

Wed 23 Mar

£182 (£164)

Wed 30 Mar

£182 (£164)

Wed 6 Apr

£182 (£164)

Explore Ceramic Forms and Surface Decoration (CE11 Summer)

A course for ceramics students to develop hand building construction techniques and explore surface decoration through pattern and texture. What will you learn on this course? This course offers ceramics students the opportunity to develop your construction techniques through hand building, and explore the relationship of surface decoration through pattern and texture. You will have the opportunity to use a variety of techniques, including sgraffito, paper resist and in-relief modelling. The course will cover the following skills and techniques: Recording and documenting of ideas Development of 2d designs into 3d objects Construction techniques Visualising the 3D form Surface decorating techniques Creating precise repeat patterns Compositional aesthetic History of ceramic art context Brush on glazing In addition, there will be opportunity to discuss ideas and intentions with the group and you will receive support in developing your own independent artistic style. The tutor will develop a guided programme of study with the group providing demonstrations and one-to-one support as required. You are encouraged to develop your own ideas within the parameters of creating hand-built pots with surface decoration. Use of a personal sketchbook is encouraged throughout this course, to enable the development of ideas, and of the student’s own working style. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, glazes, all necessary tools and the firing kiln. On completion of this course you will have broadened your ceramics skills and learned new techniques for the realisation of your own design for a hand-built pot with surface decoration. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to all levels. Learners will be introduced to this subject whilst Improvers and advanced students will be guided in their projects, The course is accessible for people with disabilities who have the relevant ceramics experience and a support worker or carer may assist if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note there is a charge for clay and firing of oversized work, please refer to the tutor for guidance. Who teaches this course? Emily-Kriste Wilcox

Wed 27 Apr

£182 (£164)

Wed 4 May

£182 (£164)

Wed 11 May

£182 (£164)

Wed 18 May

£182 (£164)

Wed 25 May

£182 (£164)

Wed 8 Jun

£182 (£164)

Wed 15 Jun

£182 (£164)

Wed 22 Jun

£182 (£164)

Wed 29 Jun

£182 (£164)

Wed 6 Jul

£182 (£164)

Wed 13 Jul

£182 (£164)

Wed 20 Jul

£182 (£164)

Explore Ceramics : Clay Porcelain & Mould Making (CE102 Spring)

Develop your ceramic skills, explore clay, porcelain and mould making techniques. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn ceramics techniques such as thumb pots, coiling, press and slip casting moulds, glazing techniques and the firing process. In addition coloured clays and porcelain are available for students to develop decorative techniques such as marbling, agateware, appliqué, inlay and layering. With the availability of coloured clay we can offer the opportunity to develop larger scale sculptural pieces. You will also build on mould making techniques using found objects or design your own mould shapes.
You will be encouraged to develop your own ideas and the tutor will teach you how to translate these ideas into your own unique designs. Using the ceramics skills you have learned you will choose the appropriate techniques to realise your design in clay. The course tutor will encourage you to develop your individual interests and styles and support you through to the completion of your project. Any work you produce on this course is yours to take home. Our fully equipped pottery studio will give you access to various clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kilns. Please note that due to COVID-19 moulds created in this course will be restricted by size to ensure participants are able to use them independently. Participants are also welcome to bring and use moulds they have created in the past. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is for improvers and advanced practitioners seeking to develop and build on their skills working with an experienced tutor. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be an additional charge for clay and firing of any oversized work, refer to the tutor for guidance. Who teaches this course? Libby Gillies

Thu 13 Jan
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Thu 20 Jan
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Thu 27 Jan
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Thu 3 Feb
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Thu 10 Feb
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Thu 17 Feb
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Thu 3 Mar
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Thu 10 Mar
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Thu 17 Mar
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Thu 24 Mar
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Thu 31 Mar
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Thu 7 Apr
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Explore Ceramics : Clay, Porcelain & Mould Making (CE102 Summer)

Develop your ceramic skills, explore clay, porcelain and mould making techniques. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn ceramics techniques such as thumb pots, coiling, press and slip casting moulds, glazing techniques and the firing process. In addition coloured clays and porcelain are available for students to develop decorative techniques such as marbling, agateware, appliqué, inlay and layering. With the availability of coloured clay we can offer the opportunity to develop larger scale sculptural pieces. You will also build on mould making techniques using found objects or design your own mould shapes.
You will be encouraged to develop your own ideas and the tutor will teach you how to translate these ideas into your own unique designs. Using the ceramics skills you have learned you will choose the appropriate techniques to realise your design in clay. The course tutor will encourage you to develop your individual interests and styles and support you through to the completion of your project. Any work you produce on this course is yours to take home. Our fully equipped pottery studio will give you access to various clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kilns. Please note that due to COVID-19 moulds created in this course will be restricted by size to ensure participants are able to use them independently. Participants are also welcome to bring and use moulds they have created in the past. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is for improvers and advanced practitioners seeking to develop and build on their skills working with an experienced tutor. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be an additional charge for clay and firing of any oversized work, refer to the tutor for guidance. Who teaches this course? Libby Gillies

Thu 28 Apr
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Thu 5 May
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Thu 12 May
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Thu 19 May
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Thu 26 May
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Thu 9 Jun
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Thu 16 Jun
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Thu 23 Jun
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Thu 30 Jun
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Thu 7 Jul
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Thu 14 Jul
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Thu 21 Jul
Ceramics Studio 3

£192 (£173)

Explore Feltmaking (TE01 Spring)

An introduction to traditional and contemporary felt making with an opportunity to experiment with a range of fibres, fabric and wool to create functional and decorative pieces. What will you learn on this course? This course is an introduction to traditional and contemporary felt making with an opportunity to experiment with a range of fibres, fabric and wool. You will be taught the skills to create tactile surfaces for stitch and dye, plus more advanced techniques including resists and nuno felting to develop functional and decorative pieces. On this course you will learn how to: • Understand the properties of wool and appreciate how and why it felts • Create 2D felt using traditional wet rolling technique • Layout wool and calculate shrinkage for wet rolling felt • Identify and work with a range of animal, plant and man-made fibres • Use colour, create pattern and ‘paint’ with the wool • Create and use pre-felt • Incorporate threads, fibres and fabric into the felt to create decorative surfaces • Make and use resists to create seamless felt The course is delivered through a mix of demonstrations and practical exercises. Students will be provided with handouts for each technique and will build a personal portfolio of samples to refer to for future felting projects. The course content is guided by the ability and prior experience of the students attending. Students wishing to re-enroll are welcomed and assisted to develop their skills further and work on individual projects with guided support from the tutor. Previously students have made wall hangings, bags, cushions, bowls, hats, jewellery, flowers and scarves. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. You don’t need any previous experience of felt making as full instruction and guidance is given. Those with some experience will be able to improve their skills, technique and develop new designs. This course involves working at low tables, includes long periods of standing and good dexterity is needed in your hands. The course may be suitable for people with disabilities, please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. A carer or support worker may assist but must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Do you need to bring anything? Please wear old clothes and bring a waterproof apron. All materials and equipment are provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Penny Dixon

Fri 14 Jan
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 21 Jan
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 28 Jan
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 4 Feb
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 11 Feb
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 18 Feb
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 25 Feb
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 4 Mar
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 11 Mar
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 18 Mar
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 25 Mar
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 1 Apr
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 8 Apr
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Explore Feltmaking (TE01 Summer)

An introduction to traditional and contemporary felt making with an opportunity to experiment with a range of fibres, fabric and wool to create functional and decorative pieces. What will you learn on this course? This course is an introduction to traditional and contemporary felt making with an opportunity to experiment with a range of fibres, fabric and wool. You will be taught the skills to create tactile surfaces for stitch and dye, plus more advanced techniques including resists and nuno felting to develop functional and decorative pieces. On this course you will learn how to: • Understand the properties of wool and appreciate how and why it felts • Create 2D felt using traditional wet rolling technique • Layout wool and calculate shrinkage for wet rolling felt • Identify and work with a range of animal, plant and man-made fibres • Use colour, create pattern and ‘paint’ with the wool • Create and use pre-felt • Incorporate threads, fibres and fabric into the felt to create decorative surfaces • Make and use resists to create seamless felt The course is delivered through a mix of demonstrations and practical exercises. Students will be provided with handouts for each technique and will build a personal portfolio of samples to refer to for future felting projects. The course content is guided by the ability and prior experience of the students attending. Students wishing to re-enroll are welcomed and assisted to develop their skills further and work on individual projects with guided support from the tutor. Previously students have made wall hangings, bags, cushions, bowls, hats, jewellery, flowers and scarves. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. You don’t need any previous experience of felt making as full instruction and guidance is given. Those with some experience will be able to improve their skills, technique and develop new designs. This course involves working at low tables, includes long periods of standing and good dexterity is needed in your hands. The course may be suitable for people with disabilities, please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. A carer or support worker may assist but must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Do you need to bring anything? Please wear old clothes and bring a waterproof apron. All materials and equipment are provided. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Penny Dixon

Fri 29 Apr
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 6 May
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 13 May
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 20 May
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 27 May
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 10 Jun
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 17 Jun
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 24 Jun
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 1 Jul
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 8 Jul
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 15 Jul
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 22 Jul
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Exposure I: Digital Photography (DM01 Spring)

A fun and friendly course introducing digital camera basics for people with a fancy camera but little idea how to use it to its full potential. What will you learn on this course? This is a fun and friendly course introducing digital camera basics for people with a fancy camera but little idea how to use it to its full potential. It’s an opportunity for you to unleash your creativity, have fun with your camera and start creating pictures you will want to keep, share and maybe even print! Or, if you have some photography experience this is an opportunity to continue or start a portfolio of your best shots or create a new body of work. You will be taught the basic rules of composition and lighting and get a real insight into what all those knobs and buttons on your camera are for. You will also learn how aperture, shutter speed and ISO all work together to help you create stunning pictures and get the best out of your camera. Throughout the course you will be encouraged to think creatively and to use your camera as a tool for expression. You will also learn post production skills and file management basics. Each week participants will be set a short weekly assignment to practice what they have learned that week. The tutor encourages knowledge sharing and participation from all members of the group creating a relaxed learning environment where you can freely ask those questions you’ve always wanted to about you camera. Some 1-2-1 support may be given but this will depend on class numbers therefore independent research, learning and the completion of practical weekly photography assignments in-between classes is encouraged. An active element of each week is downloading, discussing and reviewing each other’s images shot in response to the weekly challenge. On completion of this course you will have a solid understanding of the basics of photography and an improved confidence in the operation of your camera. You should feel inspired to be creative with your camera and want to explore your own capabilities further. Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and you don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. This course is aimed at people with a digital camera that usually shoot in ‘Auto’ but would like to understand how the camera works and how to take better pictures using manual settings. It’s ideally suited for people with DSLR, Bridge, Compact System Cameras, Mirrorless Interchangeable Lens Cameras or a compact camera for enthusiasts that has manual settings.

If you have a basic compact point and shoot camera but are thinking of upgrading to one of the above, then we do have a limited number of DSLR’s that can be borrowed during the class.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities who are able to use a camera. The room is wheelchair accessible and a carer or support worker may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Bring along your camera, a tripod if you have one and appropriate clothing for going outside.

You can bring your own laptops or tablets if you prefer to use these for post-production instead of the Apple Macs provided but please remember any cables you might need to connect your camera to your device. It is also useful if you bring a copy of your camera manual.

Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Kate Green

Mon 10 Jan
Deloitte Room

£86 (£78)

Mon 17 Jan
Deloitte Room

£86 (£78)

Mon 24 Jan
Deloitte Room

£86 (£78)

Mon 31 Jan
Deloitte Room

£86 (£78)

Mon 7 Feb
Deloitte Room

£86 (£78)

Mon 14 Feb
Deloitte Room

£86 (£78)

Exposure I: Digital Photography (DM01 Summer)

A fun and friendly course introducing digital camera basics for people with a fancy camera but little idea how to use it to its full potential. What will you learn on this course? This is a fun and friendly course introducing digital camera basics for people with a fancy camera but little idea how to use it to its full potential. It’s an opportunity for you to unleash your creativity, have fun with your camera and start creating pictures you will want to keep, share and maybe even print! Or, if you have some photography experience this is an opportunity to continue or start a portfolio of your best shots or create a new body of work. You will be taught the basic rules of composition and lighting and get a real insight into what all those knobs and buttons on your camera are for. You will also learn how aperture, shutter speed and ISO all work together to help you create stunning pictures and get the best out of your camera. Throughout the course you will be encouraged to think creatively and to use your camera as a tool for expression. You will also learn post production skills and file management basics. Each week participants will be set a short weekly assignment to practice what they have learned that week. The tutor encourages knowledge sharing and participation from all members of the group creating a relaxed learning environment where you can freely ask those questions you’ve always wanted to about you camera. Some 1-2-1 support may be given but this will depend on class numbers therefore independent research, learning and the completion of practical weekly photography assignments in-between classes is encouraged. An active element of each week is downloading, discussing and reviewing each other’s images shot in response to the weekly challenge. On completion of this course you will have a solid understanding of the basics of photography and an improved confidence in the operation of your camera. You should feel inspired to be creative with your camera and want to explore your own capabilities further. Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and you don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. This course is aimed at people with a digital camera that usually shoot in ‘Auto’ but would like to understand how the camera works and how to take better pictures using manual settings. It’s ideally suited for people with DSLR, Bridge, Compact System Cameras, Mirrorless Interchangeable Lens Cameras or a compact camera for enthusiasts that has manual settings.

If you have a basic compact point and shoot camera but are thinking of upgrading to one of the above, then we do have a limited number of DSLR’s that can be borrowed during the class.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities who are able to use a camera. The room is wheelchair accessible and a carer or support worker may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Bring along your camera, a tripod if you have one and appropriate clothing for going outside.

You can bring your own laptops or tablets if you prefer to use these for post-production instead of the Apple Macs provided but please remember any cables you might need to connect your camera to your device. It is also useful if you bring a copy of your camera manual.

Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Kate Green

Mon 25 Apr
Deloitte Room

£86 (£78)

Mon 2 May
Deloitte Room

£86 (£78)

Mon 9 May
Deloitte Room

£86 (£78)

Mon 16 May
Deloitte Room

£86 (£78)

Mon 23 May
Deloitte Room

£86 (£78)

Mon 30 May
Deloitte Room

£86 (£78)

Mon 6 Jun
Deloitte Room

£86 (£78)

Exposure II: Digital Photography (DM02 Spring)

An ideal follow on from ‘Exposure I’, this course will deepen your understanding of your camera and teach you to take better photographs in a range of genres. What will you learn on this course?

This is a fun and friendly course which is an ideal follow on from ‘Exposure 1’. It’s an opportunity for you to unleash your creativity, have fun with your camera and start creating pictures you will want to keep, share and maybe even print! You will be encouraged to continue or start a portfolio of your best shots or create a new body of work.

You will be taught how to take better landscape, travel, street photography and portrait images and how to achieve special effects in camera rather than through post production in Photoshop. During this course you will also gain a deeper understanding of the various rules of composition. Throughout the course you will be encouraged to think creatively and to use your camera as a tool for expression. Using our desktop Apple Mac computers you will also learn file management techniques and post production using Photoshop Elements. Each week participants will be set a short weekly assignment to practice what they have learned that week. It’s important to the success of this course that you have the time and the motivation to complete the weekly assignments and to work on your own portfolio or body of work. An active element of each class is downloading, discussing and reviewing each other’s images shot in response to the weekly challenge. The tutor encourages knowledge sharing and participation from all members of the group creating a relaxed learning environment where you can freely ask those questions you’ve always wanted to about you camera. Some 1-2-1 support may be given but this will depend on class numbers therefore independent research and learning is encouraged. On completion of this course you will have developed a critical eye and greater ability to select and proof your images. You will have a deeper understanding of the genres of photography and an improved confidence in the operation of your camera. You should feel inspired to be creative with your camera and want to explore your own capabilities further.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to improvers, those who have attended Exposure 1 or people with a digital camera that have a good understanding of how aperture, shutter speed and ISO all work together and usually shoot in Aperture, Shutter or Manual Mode. It’s ideally suited for people with DSLR, Bridge, Compact System Cameras, Mirrorless Interchangeable Lens Cameras or a compact camera for enthusiasts that has manual settings.

If you have a basic compact point and shoot camera but are thinking of upgrading to one of the above, then we do have a limited number of DSLRs that can be borrowed during the class.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities who are able to use a camera. The room is wheelchair accessible and a carer or support worker may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs.

Do you need to bring anything? Bring along your camera, a tripod if you have one and appropriate clothing for going outside.

You can bring your own laptops or tablets if you prefer to use these for post-production instead of the Apple Macs provided but please remember any cables you might need to connect your camera to your device. It is also useful if you bring a copy of your camera manual.

Are there any additional costs?

There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Kate Green

Mon 28 Feb
Deloitte Room

£86 (£78)

Mon 7 Mar
Deloitte Room

£86 (£78)

Mon 14 Mar
Deloitte Room

£86 (£78)

Mon 21 Mar
Deloitte Room

£86 (£78)

Mon 28 Mar
Deloitte Room

£86 (£78)

Mon 4 Apr
Deloitte Room

£86 (£78)

Exposure II: Digital Photography (DM02 Summer)

An ideal follow on from ‘Exposure I’, this course will deepen your understanding of your camera and teach you to take better photographs in a range of genres. What will you learn on this course?

This is a fun and friendly course which is an ideal follow on from ‘Exposure 1’. It’s an opportunity for you to unleash your creativity, have fun with your camera and start creating pictures you will want to keep, share and maybe even print! You will be encouraged to continue or start a portfolio of your best shots or create a new body of work.

You will be taught how to take better landscape, travel, street photography and portrait images and how to achieve special effects in camera rather than through post production in Photoshop. During this course you will also gain a deeper understanding of the various rules of composition. Throughout the course you will be encouraged to think creatively and to use your camera as a tool for expression. Using our desktop Apple Mac computers you will also learn file management techniques and post production using Photoshop Elements. Each week participants will be set a short weekly assignment to practice what they have learned that week. It’s important to the success of this course that you have the time and the motivation to complete the weekly assignments and to work on your own portfolio or body of work. An active element of each class is downloading, discussing and reviewing each other’s images shot in response to the weekly challenge. The tutor encourages knowledge sharing and participation from all members of the group creating a relaxed learning environment where you can freely ask those questions you’ve always wanted to about you camera. Some 1-2-1 support may be given but this will depend on class numbers therefore independent research and learning is encouraged. On completion of this course you will have developed a critical eye and greater ability to select and proof your images. You will have a deeper understanding of the genres of photography and an improved confidence in the operation of your camera. You should feel inspired to be creative with your camera and want to explore your own capabilities further.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to improvers, those who have attended Exposure 1 or people with a digital camera that have a good understanding of how aperture, shutter speed and ISO all work together and usually shoot in Aperture, Shutter or Manual Mode. It’s ideally suited for people with DSLR, Bridge, Compact System Cameras, Mirrorless Interchangeable Lens Cameras or a compact camera for enthusiasts that has manual settings.

If you have a basic compact point and shoot camera but are thinking of upgrading to one of the above, then we do have a limited number of DSLRs that can be borrowed during the class.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities who are able to use a camera. The room is wheelchair accessible and a carer or support worker may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs.

Do you need to bring anything? Bring along your camera, a tripod if you have one and appropriate clothing for going outside.

You can bring your own laptops or tablets if you prefer to use these for post-production instead of the Apple Macs provided but please remember any cables you might need to connect your camera to your device. It is also useful if you bring a copy of your camera manual.

Are there any additional costs?

There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Kate Green

Mon 13 Jun
Deloitte Room

£86 (£78)

Mon 20 Jun
Deloitte Room

£86 (£78)

Mon 27 Jun
Deloitte Room

£86 (£78)

Mon 4 Jul
Deloitte Room

£86 (£78)

Mon 11 Jul
Deloitte Room

£86 (£78)

Mon 18 Jul
Deloitte Room

£86 (£78)

Family Festive Wreath Workshop

Get creative as a family, learn how to make a festive paper wreath, and decorate it with your favourite animal character from Percy the Park Keeper stories. The workshop is taught by MAC’s Christmas Mural Artist Jessica Hartshorn. What will you learn on this course? You will learn how to make a festive wreath from coloured paper and art materials, then decorate with your drawing of your favourite animal from the Percy the Park Keeper stories. At the end of this special two hour workshop you will have your very own festive decoration to take home and show to family and friends.
Who is this course for? This course is suitable for children aged 6-11 years accompanied by a parent or guardian. The course is accessible for children of all abilities who can participate in practical art and craft activities. The room is wheelchair accessible. Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to. Do you need to bring anything? No, we will provide drawing and painting materials. Children should dress appropriately as some of the visual art workshops can get a bit messy. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs for this course. Who teaches this course? Jessica Hartshorn

Sat 18 Dec
Drawing and Painting Studio

£5.50 (Children £5.50–£11)

Family Pottery (FA02 Spring)

Explore the world of clay together and learn about different hand-building techniques and exciting ways to decorate your clay work. What will you learn on this course? This termly course provides an exciting introduction to ceramics. It’s a perfect opportunity for you and your child to learn more about each other as well as to develop a shared interest in the medium of clay. You will learn different hand-building techniques such as coiling, slab building, sculpting clay and using moulds. The tutor will then support you to explore your own ideas, showing you how to apply these techniques to realise your own designs. You will also have access to specialist tools to add decoration to your work including the application of glazes. You will be encouraged to review and refine your work to produce finished ceramic pieces that are unique and of a high standard. The tutor will begin by demonstrating different techniques and suggesting possible outcomes, allowing you to experiment with your own ideas. Further demonstrations and 1-2-1 support will be given as required as you develop your own projects. Class members will be encouraged to share their work and ideas with the group. A glossary of technical terms and a hand out sheet summarising what has been covered throughout the course will be provided. In addition to practical making skills the tutor will use visual resources such as ceramics magazines and books to give you an understanding of both historical and contemporary ceramic artist’s work. By the end of this course you will have learned how to use all the equipment in the ceramic studio safely and correctly. You will have learned a range of techniques, made high quality ceramic pieces to your own design and have the confidence to continue working in ceramics. Your finished glazed ceramic creation will be ready to collect from MAC two to four weeks later to allow time for firing to take place. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for children aged 6 to 12 years accompanied by their parents or guardians who are looking for an opportunity to enjoy learning together. It is open to all levels. Those with little or no experience of pottery will be shown demonstrations for the various techniques used and those with previous experience will be able to self-direct their work with guidance from the tutor. The course is accessible for people of all abilities as we provide a learning support worker, parents and guardians work with their children and all classes are planned to meet the specific needs of the group. You do need dexterity in your hands to work with clay. The room is wheelchair accessible. Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. The course price covers one adult and one child. There is a charge for each additional person (child or adult). At least one adult must be present for every three children. Who teaches this course? Andrea Clarke

Sat 15 Jan
Ceramics Studio 3

£85 (Children £85–£176)

Sat 22 Jan
Ceramics Studio 3

£85 (Children £85–£176)

Sat 29 Jan
Ceramics Studio 3

£85 (Children £85–£176)

Sat 5 Feb
Ceramics Studio 3

£85 (Children £85–£176)

Sat 12 Feb
Ceramics Studio 3

£85 (Children £85–£176)

Sat 19 Feb
Ceramics Studio 3

£85 (Children £85–£176)

Sat 5 Mar
Ceramics Studio 3

£85 (Children £85–£176)

Sat 12 Mar
Ceramics Studio 3

£85 (Children £85–£176)

Sat 19 Mar
Ceramics Studio 3

£85 (Children £85–£176)

Sat 26 Mar
Ceramics Studio 3

£85 (Children £85–£176)

Sat 2 Apr
Ceramics Studio 3

£85 (Children £85–£176)

Sat 9 Apr
Ceramics Studio 3

£85 (Children £85–£176)

Family Pottery (FA02 Summer)

Explore the world of clay together and learn about different hand-building techniques and exciting ways to decorate your clay work. What will you learn on this course? This termly course provides an exciting introduction to ceramics. It’s a perfect opportunity for you and your child to learn more about each other as well as to develop a shared interest in the medium of clay. You will learn different hand-building techniques such as coiling, slab building, sculpting clay and using moulds. The tutor will then support you to explore your own ideas, showing you how to apply these techniques to realise your own designs. You will also have access to specialist tools to add decoration to your work including the application of glazes. You will be encouraged to review and refine your work to produce finished ceramic pieces that are unique and of a high standard. The tutor will begin by demonstrating different techniques and suggesting possible outcomes, allowing you to experiment with your own ideas. Further demonstrations and 1-2-1 support will be given as required as you develop your own projects. Class members will be encouraged to share their work and ideas with the group. A glossary of technical terms and a hand out sheet summarising what has been covered throughout the course will be provided. In addition to practical making skills the tutor will use visual resources such as ceramics magazines and books to give you an understanding of both historical and contemporary ceramic artist’s work. By the end of this course you will have learned how to use all the equipment in the ceramic studio safely and correctly. You will have learned a range of techniques, made high quality ceramic pieces to your own design and have the confidence to continue working in ceramics. Your finished glazed ceramic creation will be ready to collect from MAC two to four weeks later to allow time for firing to take place. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for children aged 6 to 12 years accompanied by their parents or guardians who are looking for an opportunity to enjoy learning together. It is open to all levels. Those with little or no experience of pottery will be shown demonstrations for the various techniques used and those with previous experience will be able to self-direct their work with guidance from the tutor. The course is accessible for people of all abilities as we provide a learning support worker, parents and guardians work with their children and all classes are planned to meet the specific needs of the group. You do need dexterity in your hands to work with clay. The room is wheelchair accessible. Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. The course price covers one adult and one child. There is a charge for each additional person (child or adult). At least one adult must be present for every three children. Who teaches this course? Andrea Clarke

Sat 30 Apr
Ceramics Studio 3

£85 (Children £85–£176)

Sat 7 May
Ceramics Studio 3

£85 (Children £85–£176)

Sat 14 May
Ceramics Studio 3

£85 (Children £85–£176)

Sat 21 May
Ceramics Studio 3

£85 (Children £85–£176)

Sat 28 May
Ceramics Studio 3

£85 (Children £85–£176)

Sat 11 Jun
Ceramics Studio 3

£85 (Children £85–£176)

Sat 18 Jun
Ceramics Studio 3

£85 (Children £85–£176)

Sat 25 Jun
Ceramics Studio 3

£85 (Children £85–£176)

Sat 2 Jul
Ceramics Studio 3

£85 (Children £85–£176)

Sat 9 Jul
Ceramics Studio 3

£85 (Children £85–£176)

Sat 16 Jul
Ceramics Studio 3

£85 (Children £85–£176)

Sat 23 Jul
Ceramics Studio 3

£85 (Children £85–£176)

Family Pottery: Gingerbread Houses

Explore the world of clay together in this festive workshop as you hand-build a gingerbread house. Draw inspiration from the Frankfurt Christmas Market and Hansel and Gretel to make your very own ceramic confection! What will you learn on this course? During this one-day course, as a family you will learn how to make hand-built pottery structures while developing an interest in clay. Develop your creativity together as you spend a day playing with clay in one of MAC’s fully equipped ceramics studios. This is the perfect environment to encourage your family’s creativity. The tutor will take you through the different hand-building techniques such as coiling, slab building, and sculpting. You’ll learn how to add decoration by experimenting with a variety of glaze techniques. You will be encouraged to review and refine your work to produce a finished ceramic piece that is unique and of a high standard. All of this will enable you and your family to create a confectionary delight, sure to tempt anyone with the slightest of sweet tooth’s. By the end of this course, you will have learned how to use of the equipment in the ceramic studio safely and correctly. You will have learned a range of techniques and made a high quality ceramic piece which can stand proudly in your home for years to come. Please note that your finished gingerbread house will need time to dry out and be fired twice in MAC’s kilns. Your work will be ready for collection 4 weeks after the date of your workshop. We will contact you when the work is ready. When you arrive at MAC please ask for an Art Studio Technician or a Duty Manager who will be happy to help you retrieve your piece from our secure pottery cages. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for children aged 6 to 12 years accompanied by their parents or guardians who are looking for an opportunity to enjoy learning together. It is open to all levels. Those with little or no experience of pottery will be shown demonstrations for the various techniques used, and those with previous experience will be able to self-direct their work with guidance from the tutor. The course is accessible for people of all abilities as we provide and learning support worker. Parents and guardians work with their children and all classes are planned to meet the specific needs of the group. You do need dexterity in your hands to work with clay. The room is wheelchair accessible. Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used, and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefor need to be adhered to. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. The course price covers one adult and one child. There is a charge for each additional person (child or adult). At least one adult must be present for every three children. Who teaches this course? Emily-Kriste Wilcox

Wed 29 Dec

£20 (Children £20–£40)

Father Earth

Father Earth is the true story of one man’s attempt to help save the planet, by converting a derelict church on the Orkney Isles into an eco friendly recording studio. It’s also a fascinating study of a psychological power struggle between a character comedian - Graham Fellows - and his long-standing creation, John Shuttleworth. Father Earth is also about family relationships - specifically between fathers and sons - and it explores the paradox: how in the battle against extinction we are often distracted by personal and family issues, as they appear more important and pressing than the future of the planet. Funny yet moving, and filmed mainly in the Orkney Isles over a 10 year period, Father Earth is Graham Fellows’ most thoughtful and accomplished movie to date, with guest appearances from Sooty and Sweep, and a virtuoso performance from Graham’s mathematically driven elderly father Derek.

The screening will be followed by a live onstage Q&A with Graham Fellows.

Thu 24 Feb
Cinema

£10

Figurative Sculpture (SC01 Spring)

Working directly from a life model, explore traditional and contemporary ways to sculpt the human figure in clay. What will you learn on this course? This course is for students who will learn sculpting the human form in clay, and develop your own artistic style and technique. You will have the opportunity to model in clay from a nude life model who may hold several poses over the course duration allowing you to create for more than one sculpture. There will be more emphasis on this course on developing your observational skills and translating these into more personal representations of the human form, moving away from making a direct copy of the model. You will be encouraged to experiment and explore different approaches that will help you to find your own artistic methods and style. You will be working in MAC’s fully equipped sculpture studio with buff, terracotta and crank clays. There may be the option to fire and glaze completed works. We aim to rotate life models across classes and terms so that students are able to work from a different subject than on a previous course. Coming on this course is a great way to experience working with other like-minded people in a relaxed studio environment. By the end of the course you should have two finished sculptures that will then be fired for you to take home. Please note the clay must dry out before firing so your model will be available to collect 4-5 weeks later. There is a short break in the middle of each class. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ years and is designed for all levels, beginners, improvers and advanced practitioners as our tutor will tailor the class to your skill level. This course is perfect for students interested in the human form and learning to sculpt it in clay. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities. You do need dexterity in your hands to work with the clay and the tools. Students may bring their own carer or support worker. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? Each student is allocated a fixed amount of clay to work with. If you want to produce work that uses more than this it will be at an extra cost. Roughly £7 per large bag of clay plus a small additional to cost to fire. Who teaches this course? Martin McNally

Tue 11 Jan

£186 (£169)

Tue 18 Jan

£186 (£169)

Tue 25 Jan

£186 (£169)

Tue 1 Feb

£186 (£169)

Tue 8 Feb

£186 (£169)

Tue 15 Feb

£186 (£169)

Tue 1 Mar

£186 (£169)

Tue 8 Mar

£186 (£169)

Tue 15 Mar

£186 (£169)

Tue 22 Mar

£186 (£169)

Tue 29 Mar

£186 (£169)

Tue 5 Apr

£186 (£169)

Figurative Sculpture (SC01 Summer)

Working directly from a life model, explore traditional and contemporary ways to sculpt the human figure in clay. What will you learn on this course? This course is for students who will learn sculpting the human form in clay, and develop your own artistic style and technique. You will have the opportunity to model in clay from a nude life model who may hold several poses over the course duration allowing you to create for more than one sculpture. There will be more emphasis on this course on developing your observational skills and translating these into more personal representations of the human form, moving away from making a direct copy of the model. You will be encouraged to experiment and explore different approaches that will help you to find your own artistic methods and style. You will be working in MAC’s fully equipped sculpture studio with buff, terracotta and crank clays. There may be the option to fire and glaze completed works. We aim to rotate life models across classes and terms so that students are able to work from a different subject than on a previous course. Coming on this course is a great way to experience working with other like-minded people in a relaxed studio environment. By the end of the course you should have two finished sculptures that will then be fired for you to take home. Please note the clay must dry out before firing so your model will be available to collect 4-5 weeks later. There is a short break in the middle of each class. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ years and is designed for all levels, beginners, improvers and advanced practitioners as our tutor will tailor the class to your skill level. This course is perfect for students interested in the human form and learning to sculpt it in clay. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities. You do need dexterity in your hands to work with the clay and the tools. Students may bring their own carer or support worker. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? Each student is allocated a fixed amount of clay to work with. If you want to produce work that uses more than this it will be at an extra cost. Roughly £7 per large bag of clay plus a small additional to cost to fire. Who teaches this course? Martin McNally

Tue 26 Apr

£176 (£159)

Tue 3 May

£176 (£159)

Tue 10 May

£176 (£159)

Tue 17 May

£176 (£159)

Tue 24 May

£176 (£159)

Tue 7 Jun

£176 (£159)

Tue 14 Jun

£176 (£159)

Tue 21 Jun

£176 (£159)

Tue 28 Jun

£176 (£159)

Tue 5 Jul

£176 (£159)

Tue 12 Jul

£176 (£159)

Tue 19 Jul

£176 (£159)

Film Stories: Movie Geek Live!

The regular monthly live show returns, where Film Stories editor Simon Brew chats film, shows clips, interviews filmmakers in person and talks nerdy stuff. With special guests, an audience Q&A and lots of geeky movie stuff. Oh, and maybe even a quiz!

Wed 22 Dec
Cinema

£5–£7 (£5; Children £5)

Flower Painting & Drawing (VA102 Spring)

With the beauty of flowers as our central focus and past great artists for reference, on this practical course we will journey through techniques that capture flowers’ shape, colour and form in a variety of ways. What will you learn on this course? We will use artists such as Elizabeth Blackadder, Monet, Klimt and William Morris to focus our attention on a variety of ways to interpret and represent floral themes in art and design. This approach will provide enormous opportunity to experiment in working in a variety of media and styles, to teach and extend your abilities. This course will offer students both a practical opportunity and informative critical insight, affording all levels an opportunity to explore traditional and contemporary styles. The tutor will demonstrate techniques pertinent to the subject material alongside relevant information on approach and composition. Depending on our reference material will we experience using watercolours, gouache, oil pastels, paper collage, pastels and mixed media and more - you can engage at the level you feel comfortable.
The tutor will use a mix of group demonstrations, individual support and the examples from her own practise to guide you through the process explaining the materials and teaching the techniques. You will receive individual support on your work and how to approach and shape your work as required. The end result will be your own portfolio of works of floral art. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to all levels, including beginner, improver and experienced students. It is suitable for people who are both completely new to textiles and those who want to extend and improve their techniques and learn new approaches to design. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring along any reference material that interests you. MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs for this course. Who teaches this course? Claire Leggett

Mon 10 Jan
Garden Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 17 Jan
Garden Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 24 Jan
Garden Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 31 Jan
Garden Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 14 Feb
Garden Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 21 Feb
Garden Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 28 Feb
Garden Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 7 Mar
Garden Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 14 Mar
Garden Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 21 Mar
Garden Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 28 Mar
Garden Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 4 Apr
Garden Studio

£159 (£144)

Flower Painting & Drawing (VA102 Summer)

With the beauty of flowers as our central focus and past great artists for reference, on this practical course we will journey through techniques that capture flowers’ shape, colour and form in a variety of ways. What will you learn on this course? We will use artists such as Elizabeth Blackadder, Monet, Klimt and William Morris to focus our attention on a variety of ways to interpret and represent floral themes in art and design. This approach will provide enormous opportunity to experiment in working in a variety of media and styles, to teach and extend your abilities. This course will offer students both a practical opportunity and informative critical insight, affording all levels an opportunity to explore traditional and contemporary styles. The tutor will demonstrate techniques pertinent to the subject material alongside relevant information on approach and composition. Depending on our reference material will we experience using watercolours, gouache, oil pastels, paper collage, pastels and mixed media and more - you can engage at the level you feel comfortable.
The tutor will use a mix of group demonstrations, individual support and the examples from her own practise to guide you through the process explaining the materials and teaching the techniques. You will receive individual support on your work and how to approach and shape your work as required. The end result will be your own portfolio of works of floral art. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to all levels, including beginner, improver and experienced students. It is suitable for people who are both completely new to textiles and those who want to extend and improve their techniques and learn new approaches to design. Do you need to bring anything? Please bring along any reference material that interests you. MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs for this course. Who teaches this course? Claire Leggett

Mon 25 Apr
Garden Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 2 May
Garden Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 9 May
Garden Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 16 May
Garden Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 23 May
Garden Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 6 Jun
Garden Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 13 Jun
Garden Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 20 Jun
Garden Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 27 Jun
Garden Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 4 Jul
Garden Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 11 Jul
Garden Studio

£159 (£144)

Mon 18 Jul
Garden Studio

£159 (£144)

The French Dispatch

The French Dispatch
  • 2021
  • US
  • 1h 48min
  • 15
  • Directed by: Wes Anderson
  • Cast: Benicio del Toro, Adrien Brody, Tilda Swinton, Léa Seydoux, Frances McDormand, Timothée Chalamet, Lyna Khoudri, Jeffrey Wright, Mathieu Amalric, Stephen Park, Bill Murray, Owen Wilson

A collection of comedy-drama stories published in the eponymous fictional newspaper, The French Dispatch.

Sun 2 Jan
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Mon 3 Jan
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Tue 4 Jan
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Wed 5 Jan
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Thu 6 Jan
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Friday Evening Life Drawing and Painting with Paul Bartlett (VA10 Spring)

Join us on this Friday evening life drawing and painting class where you will build on your observation, drawing, and painting skills with the support of an experienced professional artist. You will discover a space to unwind whilst exploring art with like- minded individuals and have the unique opportunity to draw from life, and unconventional themed models. What will you learn on this course? This is not a taught course but an opportunity for more experienced students and artists to progress with their individual creative journey, while gaining confidence by relating to others in a conducive working environment. You will work directly from a professional life model who will hold a whole evening pose set up by the artist tutor. Unique to the Friday night sessions, we will have both nude models and themed models for you to explore. Previous themes have included burlesque, dancers and cosplay. The artist tutor will be teaching through demonstration and working on his own art works, establishing an environment that enables all artists to benefit from shared concentration. One-to-one support may be given if requested by students, to consolidate drawing skills including measurement, proportion, line, tone, colour, using art materials such as pencils, charcoal, pastels and paint. The course is excellent for building your artistic portfolio. This class includes a short break and an opportunity to socialise with other students, the tutor and model. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to students who can work independently, and are improvers or advanced. This course is beneficial to students wishing to supplement basic methods and techniques taught on other courses as well as those putting together a portfolio, artists wishing to resolve works for exhibition and art teachers seeking quality creative time for themselves. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as the room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? The painting and drawing studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day. MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own cost. This would typically include cartridge paper, drawing materials, masking tape, paints, brushes and palettes. Who teaches this course? Paul Bartlett

Fri 14 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Fri 21 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Fri 28 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Fri 4 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Fri 11 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Fri 18 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Fri 4 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Fri 11 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Fri 18 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Fri 25 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Fri 1 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Fri 8 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Friday Evening Life Drawing and Painting with Paul Bartlett (VA10 Summer)

Join us on this Friday evening life drawing and painting class where you will build on your observation, drawing, and painting skills with the support of an experienced professional artist. You will discover a space to unwind whilst exploring art with like- minded individuals and have the unique opportunity to draw from life, and unconventional themed models. What will you learn on this course? This is not a taught course but an opportunity for more experienced students and artists to progress with their individual creative journey, while gaining confidence by relating to others in a conducive working environment. You will work directly from a professional life model who will hold a whole evening pose set up by the artist tutor. Unique to the Friday night sessions, we will have both nude models and themed models for you to explore. Previous themes have included burlesque, dancers and cosplay. The artist tutor will be teaching through demonstration and working on his own art works, establishing an environment that enables all artists to benefit from shared concentration. One-to-one support may be given if requested by students, to consolidate drawing skills including measurement, proportion, line, tone, colour, using art materials such as pencils, charcoal, pastels and paint. The course is excellent for building your artistic portfolio. This class includes a short break and an opportunity to socialise with other students, the tutor and model. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to students who can work independently, and are improvers or advanced. This course is beneficial to students wishing to supplement basic methods and techniques taught on other courses as well as those putting together a portfolio, artists wishing to resolve works for exhibition and art teachers seeking quality creative time for themselves. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as the room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? The painting and drawing studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day. MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own cost. This would typically include cartridge paper, drawing materials, masking tape, paints, brushes and palettes. Who teaches this course? Paul Bartlett

Fri 29 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Fri 6 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Fri 13 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Fri 20 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Fri 27 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Fri 10 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Fri 17 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Fri 24 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Fri 1 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Fri 8 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Fri 15 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Fri 22 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£159 (£144)

Gentle Hatha Yoga (WB09 Spring)

This gentle form of yoga exercise combines physical practice with meditation leading to a more relaxed state of being. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn Hatha yoga, a gentle form of yoga exercise. Each class provides approximately 1hr of physical practice which includes postures based on lying down, sitting, kneeling and standing positions. The remaining time is divided between a breathing or meditation practice and a relaxation. The class emphasises working steadily and mindfully in coordination with the breath. As a new posture is introduced each week and those covered in previous weeks are revisited you will gain the most benefit by attending on a regular basis from the beginning of the term. The tutor provides group instruction with individual assistance as required. By attending this course you can expect to improve your physical coordination of movement and breath, balance and increase awareness of your posture. With practice you will cultivate a more relaxed state of being and a greater union of body, breath and mind. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ and is suitable for all ability levels including beginners who have no prior experience of Hatha yoga. This may be suitable during pregnancy if over 14 weeks, but please contact us to discuss prior to the course. You should consult your doctor if you have any medical conditions which could be affected by taking exercise. The course is accessible for people with disabilities but you must be able to get up and down from the floor unaided. Students can be accompanied by their own carer or support worker. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Please wear comfortable clothes that allow free movement. You also need to bring a yoga mat and a blanket to keep warm during meditation. MAC can provide basic equipment and materials to participants attending most courses if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? You must provide a yoga mat and blanket at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Madeleine Mott

Tue 1 Mar
Randle Studio

£58.50 (£53)

Tue 8 Mar
Randle Studio

£58.50 (£53)

Tue 15 Mar
Randle Studio

£58.50 (£53)

Tue 22 Mar
Randle Studio

£58.50 (£53)

Tue 29 Mar
Randle Studio

£58.50 (£53)

Tue 5 Apr
Randle Studio

£58.50 (£53)

Gentle Hatha Yoga (WB09 Summer)

This gentle form of yoga exercise combines physical practice with meditation leading to a more relaxed state of being. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn Hatha yoga, a gentle form of yoga exercise. Each class provides approximately 1hr of physical practice which includes postures based on lying down, sitting, kneeling and standing positions. The remaining time is divided between a breathing or meditation practice and a relaxation. The class emphasises working steadily and mindfully in coordination with the breath. As a new posture is introduced each week and those covered in previous weeks are revisited you will gain the most benefit by attending on a regular basis from the beginning of the term. The tutor provides group instruction with individual assistance as required. By attending this course you can expect to improve your physical coordination of movement and breath, balance and increase awareness of your posture. With practice you will cultivate a more relaxed state of being and a greater union of body, breath and mind. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ and is suitable for all ability levels including beginners who have no prior experience of Hatha yoga. This may be suitable during pregnancy if over 14 weeks, but please contact us to discuss prior to the course. You should consult your doctor if you have any medical conditions which could be affected by taking exercise. The course is accessible for people with disabilities but you must be able to get up and down from the floor unaided. Students can be accompanied by their own carer or support worker. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Please wear comfortable clothes that allow free movement. You also need to bring a yoga mat and a blanket to keep warm during meditation. MAC can provide basic equipment and materials to participants attending most courses if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? You must provide a yoga mat and blanket at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Madeleine Mott

Tue 26 Apr
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Tue 3 May
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Tue 10 May
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Tue 17 May
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Tue 24 May
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Tue 7 Jun
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Tue 14 Jun
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Tue 21 Jun
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Tue 28 Jun
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Tue 5 Jul
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Tue 12 Jul
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Tue 19 Jul
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Ghostbusters: Afterlife

Ghostbusters: Afterlife
  • 2021
  • US
  • 2h 4min
  • 12A
  • Directed by: Jason Reitman
  • Cast: Mckenna Grace, Finn Wolfhard, Paul Rudd, Carrie Coon, Bill Murray, Sigourney Weaver, Dan Aykroyd, Ernie Hudson, Celeste O'Connor, Logan Kim

Another instalment for the ever popular Ghostbusters franchise. This is a sequel to the first two films and is directed by Jason Reitman, son of their director, Ivan Reitman.

Sun 26 Dec
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Mon 27 Dec
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Wed 29 Dec
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Thu 30 Dec
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Fri 31 Dec
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Sat 1 Jan
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Graphic Design for Beginners (DM110 Spring)

Learn the basics of the art of graphic design using Adobe Photoshop and Adobe illustrator.

What will you learn on this course? This is an introductory course for anyone interested in graphic design and wishing to learn techniques and methods to create their own digital designs.

You will learn some practical skills and techniques of digital design and some tools used by graphic designers to create professional looking visual communication projects using Adobe Creative software Illustrator and Photoshop. This course will give you knowledge that you can use to develop logo designs, posters, flyers and banners, business cards, and other design projects. You will also learn how to work with a Wacom or Xpen artist graphic tablet.

Lessons will cover a variety of topics including - basic principles of design - colour and image in digital media, - introduction to typography, - basic principles of layout, - basic photo editing in Photoshop - creating vectors in Illustrator - preparing images for printing or digital media, - developing a project brief - design concept creation.

At the end of the course, you will feel confident to start creating your own design projects using Adobe Creative software Illustrator and Photoshop.

Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. It is designed for beginner level or those wishing to refresh their skills. Basic computing skills such as knowing how to utilise a computer or laptop and navigate on the internet are required.

What you will need on this course:
 Please bring a 32GB USB stick or external hard drive so that you can take your work home.

Are there any additional costs? No

Who Teaches this Course Paula Ligo

Wed 12 Jan
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Wed 19 Jan
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Wed 26 Jan
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Wed 2 Feb
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Wed 9 Feb
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Wed 16 Feb
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Wed 23 Feb
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Wed 2 Mar
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Wed 9 Mar
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Wed 16 Mar
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Wed 23 Mar
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Wed 30 Mar
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Graphic Design for Beginners (DM110 Summer)

Learn the art of graphic design using Adobe Photoshop and Adobe illustrator.

What will you learn on this course?

This is an introductory course for anyone interested in graphic design and wishing to learn techniques and methods to create their own digital designs. We will use a mixture of analog and digital techniques, creating sketches on paper first, then digitalising and painting them directly on Photoshop. Other techniques will show you how to create your artworks entirely on Adobe Photoshop using photographic reference. Participants who are already familiar with Adobe Photoshop can learn other graphic softwares such as Adobe Illustrator in the second half of this course; this will depend on previous skills and project type.

On this short course, You will learn: Adobe photoshop • Working with a Wacom or Xpen artist graphic tablet • Photo editing • Lettering • Adjustments • Colour picker?

At the end of the course, you will have

Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. It is designed for beginner level or those wishing to refresh their skills. What you will need on this course:

Please bring a 32GB USB stick or external hard drive so that you can take your work home. Are there any additional costs? No Who Teaches this Course Paula Ligo

Wed 27 Apr
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Wed 4 May
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Wed 11 May
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Wed 18 May
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Wed 1 Jun
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Wed 8 Jun
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Wed 15 Jun
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Wed 22 Jun
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Wed 29 Jun
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Wed 6 Jul
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Wed 13 Jul
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Wed 20 Jul
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

The Hand of God

The Hand of God
  • 2021
  • Italy
  • 2h 10min
  • 15
  • Directed by: Paolo Sorrentino
  • Cast: Filippo Scotti, Toni Servillo, Teresa Saponangelo, Marlon Joubert

The coming of age story of Fabietto Schisa (Filippo Scotti), set against the backdrop of Naples in the 1980s.

Fri 21 Jan
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Sat 22 Jan
Cinema

£8–£10.25

Hatha Yoga (WB13 Spring)

This yoga course combines meditation, postures and breathing techniques to develop profound relaxation, inviting more consciousness and wellbeing into our daily lives. What will you learn on this course? Hatha is a subtle classical yoga which incorporates various asanas (postures) and is deepened with the use of pranayamas (breathing exercises) and meditation. You will learn sequences that combine postures and breathing exercises. You will also learn various meditation techniques and discover how yoga can help to improve balance, flexibility and concentration. This is complemented by a sense of well-being which arises naturally from the process of engaging in yoga. By attending this course you can expect to gain a deeper understanding of the philosophy of yoga and the confidence to practice both in the class and independently. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ and is open to students of all levels. It is suitable for beginners with no previous experience and those wishing to deepen their practice. The nature of the course has a philosophy that allows students to participate in group sequences while developing their own understanding and engaging with yoga at their own pace. Yoga is an individual experience and alternative options for the postures will be offered where possible so that each student is able to relax their body and mind throughout the session.
The course may be accessible for people with disabilities. Students can be accompanied by their own carer or support worker. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. You should avoid having a meal during the 2 hours before the class. Please note that this course is not designed for pregnant women. All students should inform the tutor of any ongoing health problems. Do you need to bring anything? Please wear comfortable clothes that allow free movement. You must bring your own yoga mat and a blanket or extra layer of clothing to keep you warm during meditation. Are there any additional costs? You must provide a non-slip yoga mat at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Helen Wallis

Thu 13 Jan
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 20 Jan
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 27 Jan
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 3 Feb
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 10 Feb
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 17 Feb
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 3 Mar
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 10 Mar
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 17 Mar
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 24 Mar
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 31 Mar
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 7 Apr
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Hatha Yoga (WB13 Summer)

This yoga course combines meditation, postures and breathing techniques to develop profound relaxation, inviting more consciousness and wellbeing into our daily lives. What will you learn on this course? Hatha is a subtle classical yoga which incorporates various asanas (postures) and is deepened with the use of pranayamas (breathing exercises) and meditation. You will learn sequences that combine postures and breathing exercises. You will also learn various meditation techniques and discover how yoga can help to improve balance, flexibility and concentration. This is complemented by a sense of well-being which arises naturally from the process of engaging in yoga. By attending this course you can expect to gain a deeper understanding of the philosophy of yoga and the confidence to practice both in the class and independently. Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ and is open to students of all levels. It is suitable for beginners with no previous experience and those wishing to deepen their practice. The nature of the course has a philosophy that allows students to participate in group sequences while developing their own understanding and engaging with yoga at their own pace. Yoga is an individual experience and alternative options for the postures will be offered where possible so that each student is able to relax their body and mind throughout the session.
The course may be accessible for people with disabilities. Students can be accompanied by their own carer or support worker. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. You should avoid having a meal during the 2 hours before the class. Please note that this course is not designed for pregnant women. All students should inform the tutor of any ongoing health problems. Do you need to bring anything? Please wear comfortable clothes that allow free movement. You must bring your own yoga mat and a blanket or extra layer of clothing to keep you warm during meditation. Are there any additional costs? You must provide a non-slip yoga mat at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Helen Wallis

Thu 28 Apr
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 5 May
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 12 May
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 19 May
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 26 May
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 9 Jun
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 16 Jun
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 23 Jun
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 30 Jun
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 7 Jul
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 14 Jul
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 21 Jul
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

HIIT Fitness Workshop (WB107 Spring)

Join professional fitness instructor Matt Balfour in this fun, energetic interval fitness workshop that will help you save time, reduce stress and lose inches. What will you learn on this course? HIIT stands for high intensity interval training, short bursts of exercise designed to boost your overall fitness and increase your mental health and wellbeing. Matt specialises in the delivery of bodyweight-only Tabata based live HIIT workouts. Tabata is a form of High Intensity Interval Training which is specifically designed to help you burn the maximum number of calories in a minimal amount of time.

Features The 45-minute workshop will include • 10 min warm up • 24 min HIIT Workout (Body weight only) • 10 min cool down • Fun - Themed workouts - 80’s, Halloween, etc • Barrier Free, all abilities welcome

Background/Benefits This form of HIIT was developed off the back of performance led research conducted in the mid 1990’s by Dr Izumi Tabata and the Japanese Olympic Ice-Skating Team. At the conclusion of the study, they found that the Tabata HIIT protocol resulted in considerable improvements to the athletes V02 Max and Anaerobic Threshold over those that did not take part in the study. It was also shown to increase Excess Post Exercise Oxygen Consumption (EPOC). Which is the period of time post-workout that your body continues to burn calories at a higher rate. Matt Balfour has adapted the original Tabata protocol to deliver functional full-body HIIT workouts that focus on four key areas of performance and ability. They are Aerobic Output, Explosive Power, Core Stability and Balance & Coordination Matt’s text from website Keeping those happy hormones pumping will ensure the mind stays motivated, and people feel positive towards their week ahead, and get an affirmative boost

Tue 11 Jan
Randle Studio

£52 (£47)

Tue 18 Jan
Randle Studio

£52 (£47)

Tue 25 Jan
Randle Studio

£52 (£47)

Tue 1 Feb
Randle Studio

£52 (£47)

Tue 8 Feb
Randle Studio

£52 (£47)

Tue 15 Feb
Randle Studio

£52 (£47)

HIIT Fitness Workshop (WB107 Summer)

Join professional fitness instructor Matt Balfour in this fun, energetic interval fitness workshop that will help you save time, reduce stress and lose inches. What will you learn on this course? HIIT stands for high intensity interval training, short bursts of exercise designed to boost your overall fitness and increase your mental health and wellbeing. Matt specialises in the delivery of bodyweight-only Tabata based live HIIT workouts. Tabata is a form of High Intensity Interval Training which is specifically designed to help you burn the maximum number of calories in a minimal amount of time.

Features The 45-minute workshop will include • 10 min warm up • 24 min HIIT Workout (Body weight only) • 10 min cool down • Fun - Themed workouts - 80’s, Halloween, etc • Barrier Free, all abilities welcome

Background/Benefits This form of HIIT was developed off the back of performance led research conducted in the mid 1990’s by Dr Izumi Tabata and the Japanese Olympic Ice-Skating Team. At the conclusion of the study, they found that the Tabata HIIT protocol resulted in considerable improvements to the athletes V02 Max and Anaerobic Threshold over those that did not take part in the study. It was also shown to increase Excess Post Exercise Oxygen Consumption (EPOC). Which is the period of time post-workout that your body continues to burn calories at a higher rate. Matt Balfour has adapted the original Tabata protocol to deliver functional full-body HIIT workouts that focus on four key areas of performance and ability. They are Aerobic Output, Explosive Power, Core Stability and Balance & Coordination Matt’s text from website Keeping those happy hormones pumping will ensure the mind stays motivated, and people feel positive towards their week ahead, and get an affirmative boost

Tue 3 May
Randle Studio

£52 (£47)

Tue 10 May
Randle Studio

£52 (£47)

Tue 17 May
Randle Studio

£52 (£47)

Tue 24 May
Randle Studio

£52 (£47)

Tue 7 Jun
Randle Studio

£52 (£47)

Tue 14 Jun
Randle Studio

£52 (£47)

HIIT Fitness Workshop (WB108 Spring)

Join professional fitness instructor Matt Balfour in this fun, energetic interval fitness workshop that will help you save time, reduce stress and lose inches. What will you learn on this course? HIIT stands for high intensity interval training, short bursts of exercise designed to boost your overall fitness and increase your mental health and wellbeing. Matt specialises in the delivery of bodyweight-only Tabata based live HIIT workouts. Tabata is a form of High Intensity Interval Training which is specifically designed to help you burn the maximum number of calories in a minimal amount of time.

Features The 45-minute workshop will include • 10 min warm up • 24 min HIIT Workout (Body weight only) • 10 min cool down • Fun - Themed workouts - 80’s, Halloween, etc • Barrier Free, all abilities welcome

Background/Benefits This form of HIIT was developed off the back of performance led research conducted in the mid 1990’s by Dr Izumi Tabata and the Japanese Olympic Ice-Skating Team. At the conclusion of the study, they found that the Tabata HIIT protocol resulted in considerable improvements to the athletes V02 Max and Anaerobic Threshold over those that did not take part in the study. It was also shown to increase Excess Post Exercise Oxygen Consumption (EPOC). Which is the period of time post-workout that your body continues to burn calories at a higher rate. Matt Balfour has adapted the original Tabata protocol to deliver functional full-body HIIT workouts that focus on four key areas of performance and ability. They are Aerobic Output, Explosive Power, Core Stability and Balance & Coordination Matt’s text from website Keeping those happy hormones pumping will ensure the mind stays motivated, and people feel positive towards their week ahead, and get an affirmative boost

Tue 11 Jan
Randle Studio

£52 (£47)

Tue 18 Jan
Randle Studio

£52 (£47)

Tue 25 Jan
Randle Studio

£52 (£47)

Tue 1 Feb
Randle Studio

£52 (£47)

Tue 8 Feb
Randle Studio

£52 (£47)

Tue 15 Feb
Randle Studio

£52 (£47)

HIIT Fitness Workshop (WB108 Summer)

Join professional fitness instructor Matt Balfour in this fun, energetic interval fitness workshop that will help you save time, reduce stress and lose inches. What will you learn on this course? HIIT stands for high intensity interval training, short bursts of exercise designed to boost your overall fitness and increase your mental health and wellbeing. Matt specialises in the delivery of bodyweight-only Tabata based live HIIT workouts. Tabata is a form of High Intensity Interval Training which is specifically designed to help you burn the maximum number of calories in a minimal amount of time.

Features The 45-minute workshop will include • 10 min warm up • 24 min HIIT Workout (Body weight only) • 10 min cool down • Fun - Themed workouts - 80’s, Halloween, etc • Barrier Free, all abilities welcome

Background/Benefits This form of HIIT was developed off the back of performance led research conducted in the mid 1990’s by Dr Izumi Tabata and the Japanese Olympic Ice-Skating Team. At the conclusion of the study, they found that the Tabata HIIT protocol resulted in considerable improvements to the athletes V02 Max and Anaerobic Threshold over those that did not take part in the study. It was also shown to increase Excess Post Exercise Oxygen Consumption (EPOC). Which is the period of time post-workout that your body continues to burn calories at a higher rate. Matt Balfour has adapted the original Tabata protocol to deliver functional full-body HIIT workouts that focus on four key areas of performance and ability. They are Aerobic Output, Explosive Power, Core Stability and Balance & Coordination Matt’s text from website Keeping those happy hormones pumping will ensure the mind stays motivated, and people feel positive towards their week ahead, and get an affirmative boost

Tue 3 May
Randle Studio

£112 (£101)

Tue 10 May
Randle Studio

£112 (£101)

Tue 17 May
Randle Studio

£112 (£101)

Tue 24 May
Randle Studio

£112 (£101)

Tue 7 Jun
Randle Studio

£112 (£101)

Tue 14 Jun
Randle Studio

£112 (£101)

Home Alone

Home Alone
  • 1990
  • US
  • 1h 43min
  • PG
  • Directed by: Chris Columbus
  • Written by: John Hughes
  • Cast: Macaulay Culkin, Joe Pesci, Daniel Stern, John Heard, Catherine O'Hara

Peter and Kate McCallister (Heard and O'Hara) have an eight-year-old brat and wisely – albeit accidentally – leave him behind in Chicago when they go on holiday to Paris. Left to his own devices young Kevin (Culkin) has to deal with two bungling burglars (Pesci and Stern) who threaten to invade his peaceful haven. Jolly, if sadistic, scare-comedy antics produced by teen flick veteran John Hughes.

Sat 18 Dec
Cinema

£5–£7 (£5; Children £5)

Tue 21 Dec
Cinema

£5–£7 (£5; Children £5)

Home Alone 2: Lost in New York

Home Alone 2: Lost in New York
  • 1992
  • US
  • 2h
  • PG
  • Directed by: Chris Columbus
  • Written by: John Hughes
  • Cast: Macaulay Culkin, Joe Pesci, Daniel Stern

Young Kevin McAllister is once again left alone for Christmas (this time in the Big Apple), with two crooks to contend with.

Tue 21 Dec
Cinema

£5–£7 (£5; Children £5)

Introduction to Art Techniques (VA06 Spring)

An introduction to the different art techniques and skills used in drawing and painting taught through personal projects to develop each individual student’s own style and approach. What will you learn on this course? This course provides an introduction to the different art techniques and materials used in drawing and painting. The aim of this course is to equip you with the skills required to begin to develop your own individual artistic style and approach. You will learn to use the following materials: • Charcoal • Pastel • Inks • Acrylics • Mixed media and specific painting techniques including: • layering of paint • composition • colour mixing • use of colour You will learn these techniques by drawing and painting a range of subjects such as landscapes, still life, portraits and abstracts. During the first half of the term new techniques are taught through tutor demonstrations and whole-group projects set by the tutor followed by group discussion and feedback. As the course progresses and your skills develop there will be the opportunity to work on your own individual projects. You will be encouraged to work independently with one-to-one support from the tutor. Guidance will be tailored to your level of experience to help you to achieve your aims for your work. In addition to practical drawing and painting techniques the course focuses on creative skills, artistic knowledge and self-confidence. On completion of this course students will usually have produced several finished drawings and paintings, along with supporting drawings, paintings, photographs and research. You can expect to have gained new skills and confidence in art techniques and enjoyed working in a friendly, lively class of like-minded people. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners who may be completely new to painting and drawing or anyone who would like to revisit basic techniques. You don’t need any previous experience as full instruction is given. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as the room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day, such as pencils, erasers, sharpeners, brushes and paint. You may wish to bring additional art materials to work with. MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own cost. This would typically include cartridge paper, drawing materials, acrylic paints, brushes and palettes. Who teaches this course? Niall Singh

Thu 13 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 20 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 27 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 3 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 10 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 17 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 3 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 10 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 17 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 24 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 31 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 7 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Introduction to Art Techniques (VA06 Summer)

An introduction to the different art techniques and skills used in drawing and painting taught through personal projects to develop each individual student’s own style and approach. What will you learn on this course? This course provides an introduction to the different art techniques and materials used in drawing and painting. The aim of this course is to equip you with the skills required to begin to develop your own individual artistic style and approach. You will learn to use the following materials: • Charcoal • Pastel • Inks • Acrylics • Mixed media and specific painting techniques including: • layering of paint • composition • colour mixing • use of colour You will learn these techniques by drawing and painting a range of subjects such as landscapes, still life, portraits and abstracts. During the first half of the term new techniques are taught through tutor demonstrations and whole-group projects set by the tutor followed by group discussion and feedback. As the course progresses and your skills develop there will be the opportunity to work on your own individual projects. You will be encouraged to work independently with one-to-one support from the tutor. Guidance will be tailored to your level of experience to help you to achieve your aims for your work. In addition to practical drawing and painting techniques the course focuses on creative skills, artistic knowledge and self-confidence. On completion of this course students will usually have produced several finished drawings and paintings, along with supporting drawings, paintings, photographs and research. You can expect to have gained new skills and confidence in art techniques and enjoyed working in a friendly, lively class of like-minded people. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners who may be completely new to painting and drawing or anyone who would like to revisit basic techniques. You don’t need any previous experience as full instruction is given. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as the room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day, such as pencils, erasers, sharpeners, brushes and paint. You may wish to bring additional art materials to work with. MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own cost. This would typically include cartridge paper, drawing materials, acrylic paints, brushes and palettes. Who teaches this course? Niall Singh

Thu 28 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 5 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 12 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 19 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 26 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 9 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 16 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 23 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 30 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 7 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 14 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 21 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Introduction to Art Techniques (VA07 Spring)

An introduction to the different art techniques and skills used in drawing and painting taught through personal projects to develop each individual student’s own style and approach. What will you learn on this course? This course provides an introduction to the different art techniques and materials used in drawing and painting. The aim of this course is to equip you with the skills required to begin to develop your own individual artistic style and approach. You will learn to use the following materials: Charcoal Pastel Inks Acrylics Mixed media and specific painting techniques including: layering of paint composition colour mixing use of colour You will learn these techniques by drawing and painting a range of subjects such as landscapes, still life, portraits and abstracts. During the first half of the term new techniques are taught through tutor demonstrations and whole-group projects set by the tutor followed by group discussion and feedback. As the course progresses and your skills develop there will be the opportunity to work on your own individual projects. You will be encouraged to work independently with one-to-one support from the tutor. Guidance will be tailored to your level of experience to help you to achieve your aims for your work. In addition to practical drawing and painting techniques the course focuses on creative skills, artistic knowledge and self-confidence. On completion of this course students will usually have produced several finished drawings and paintings, along with supporting drawings, paintings, photographs and research. You can expect to have gained new skills and confidence in art techniques and enjoyed working in a friendly, lively class of like-minded people. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners who may be completely new to painting and drawing or anyone who would like to revisit basic techniques. You don’t need any previous experience as full instruction is given.
The course is accessible for people with disabilities as the room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day, such as pencils, erasers, sharpeners, brushes and paint. You may wish to bring additional art materials to work with. MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own cost. This would typically include cartridge paper, drawing materials, acrylic paints, brushes and palettes. Who teaches this course? Peter Tinkler

Thu 13 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£173 (£157)

Thu 20 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£173 (£157)

Thu 27 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£173 (£157)

Thu 3 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£173 (£157)

Thu 10 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£173 (£157)

Thu 17 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£173 (£157)

Thu 3 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£173 (£157)

Thu 10 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£173 (£157)

Thu 17 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£173 (£157)

Thu 24 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£173 (£157)

Thu 31 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£173 (£157)

Thu 7 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£173 (£157)

Introduction to Art Techniques (VA07 Summer)

An introduction to the different art techniques and skills used in drawing and painting taught through personal projects to develop each individual student’s own style and approach. What will you learn on this course? This course provides an introduction to the different art techniques and materials used in drawing and painting. The aim of this course is to equip you with the skills required to begin to develop your own individual artistic style and approach. You will learn to use the following materials: Charcoal Pastel Inks Acrylics Mixed media and specific painting techniques including: layering of paint composition colour mixing use of colour You will learn these techniques by drawing and painting a range of subjects such as landscapes, still life, portraits and abstracts. During the first half of the term new techniques are taught through tutor demonstrations and whole-group projects set by the tutor followed by group discussion and feedback. As the course progresses and your skills develop there will be the opportunity to work on your own individual projects. You will be encouraged to work independently with one-to-one support from the tutor. Guidance will be tailored to your level of experience to help you to achieve your aims for your work. In addition to practical drawing and painting techniques the course focuses on creative skills, artistic knowledge and self-confidence. On completion of this course students will usually have produced several finished drawings and paintings, along with supporting drawings, paintings, photographs and research. You can expect to have gained new skills and confidence in art techniques and enjoyed working in a friendly, lively class of like-minded people. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners who may be completely new to painting and drawing or anyone who would like to revisit basic techniques. You don’t need any previous experience as full instruction is given.
The course is accessible for people with disabilities as the room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day, such as pencils, erasers, sharpeners, brushes and paint. You may wish to bring additional art materials to work with. MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? As the course progresses students should expect to provide some of their own art materials that they bring to the class at their own cost. This would typically include cartridge paper, drawing materials, acrylic paints, brushes and palettes. Who teaches this course? Peter Tinkler

Thu 28 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 5 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 12 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 19 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 26 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 9 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 16 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 23 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 30 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 7 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 14 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Thu 21 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£163 (£147)

Introduction to Basket Weaving (TE107 Spring)

Always wanted to try basket weaving. Now is the time to learn about this age-old heritage craftsmanship! During the course you will learn the fundamentals of basketry and weaving with willow. Throughout the course you will be thoroughly introduced to two main basketry methods: frame baskets and stake & strand baskets.

What will you learn on this course? This course is for those who are looking for an enjoyable and unusual new hobby which produces attractive and useful results from natural materials. Throughout the workshop you will be guided through the fundamentals of basket weaving with different types of willow. You will be taught traditional methods to make beautiful accessories for the modern home. You will be guided through several tutor-led demos and set tasks which will introduce tips and techniques for you to create your own basket, which you will then be able to bring home.

On this course you will learn: • How to choose and prepare materials for weaving • How to use the appropriate tools for basketry • Different types of weave, wale and border techniques • How to create a frame basket or a round basket.

In addition, there will be opportunity to discuss ideas and intentions with the group and you will receive support in developing your own independent artistic style. The tutor will develop a guided programme of study with the group providing demonstrations and one-to-one support as required. The use of a personal sketchbook is encouraged to enable the development of ideas and of the student’s own working style. On completion of this course, you will have the fundamental skills needed to create baskets from natural materials.

Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and no previous experience is required. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities. You do need dexterity in your hands to work with the willow and tools. Students may bring their own Carer or support worker. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs.

Do you need to bring anything? You do not need to bring anything. All materials and equipment are provided.

Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials.

Who teaches this course? ILdiko Nagy

Mon 10 Jan
Garden Studio

£178 (£161)

Mon 17 Jan
Garden Studio

£178 (£161)

Mon 24 Jan
Garden Studio

£178 (£161)

Mon 31 Jan
Garden Studio

£178 (£161)

Mon 7 Feb
Garden Studio

£178 (£161)

Mon 14 Feb
Garden Studio

£178 (£161)

Mon 28 Feb
Garden Studio

£178 (£161)

Mon 7 Mar
Garden Studio

£178 (£161)

Mon 14 Mar
Garden Studio

£178 (£161)

Mon 21 Mar
Garden Studio

£178 (£161)

Mon 28 Mar
Garden Studio

£178 (£161)

Mon 4 Apr
Garden Studio

£178 (£161)

Introduction to Basket Weaving (TE107 Summer)

Always wanted to try basket weaving. Now is the time to learn about this age-old heritage craftsmanship! During the course you will learn the fundamentals of basketry and weaving with willow. Throughout the course you will be thoroughly introduced to two main basketry methods: frame baskets and stake & strand baskets.

What will you learn on this course? This course is for those who are looking for an enjoyable and unusual new hobby which produces attractive and useful results from natural materials. Throughout the workshop you will be guided through the fundamentals of basket weaving with different types of willow. You will be taught traditional methods to make beautiful accessories for the modern home. You will be guided through several tutor-led demos and set tasks which will introduce tips and techniques for you to create your own basket, which you will then be able to bring home.

On this course you will learn: • How to choose and prepare materials for weaving • How to use the appropriate tools for basketry • Different types of weave, wale and border techniques • How to create a frame basket or a round basket.

In addition, there will be opportunity to discuss ideas and intentions with the group and you will receive support in developing your own independent artistic style. The tutor will develop a guided programme of study with the group providing demonstrations and one-to-one support as required. The use of a personal sketchbook is encouraged to enable the development of ideas and of the student’s own working style. On completion of this course, you will have the fundamental skills needed to create baskets from natural materials.

Who is this course for? This course is for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and no previous experience is required. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities. You do need dexterity in your hands to work with the willow and tools. Students may bring their own Carer or support worker. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs.

Do you need to bring anything? You do not need to bring anything. All materials and equipment are provided.

Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials.

Who teaches this course? ILdiko Nagy

Mon 25 Apr
Garden Studio

£178 (£161)

Mon 2 May
Garden Studio

£178 (£161)

Mon 9 May
Garden Studio

£178 (£161)

Mon 16 May
Garden Studio

£178 (£161)

Mon 23 May
Garden Studio

£178 (£161)

Mon 6 Jun
Garden Studio

£178 (£161)

Mon 13 Jun
Garden Studio

£178 (£161)

Mon 20 Jun
Garden Studio

£178 (£161)

Mon 27 Jun
Garden Studio

£178 (£161)

Mon 4 Jul
Garden Studio

£178 (£161)

Mon 11 Jul
Garden Studio

£178 (£161)

Mon 18 Jul
Garden Studio

£178 (£161)

Introduction to Ceramics (CE02 Spring)

Learn basic making techniques in clay including coiling, throwing and slab pots. Take home a finished piece and an understanding of the art of clay and ceramics. What will you learn on this course? In this weekly class you will receive an introduction to ceramics and the hand-building techniques used. Your tutor will demonstrate a range of techniques throughout the course such as coiling, slab-building, throwing and press-moulding. There will also be demonstrations of different approaches to glazing to achieve a variety of surface effects, this will include dipping, pouring, spraying and the use of wax resist. You will have the opportunity to work with coloured slips which allows for a more controlled outcome. The tutor will give whole class demonstrations of the various techniques in the early stages of the course and then individual, specialist guidance will be given on your projects as and when it’s needed. You will be able to work at your own pace and encouraged to work on individual projects of your own design. Further demonstrations of specific techniques can also be given to smaller numbers within the group or one-to-one upon request. Those learners with more experience will be able to self-direct their work and the tutor will offer guidance as and when it’s needed. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kiln. On completion of this course you will have gained a variety of practical ceramics skills and learned new techniques through the development of individual pieces or a collection of work. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to all levels. You don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC can provide basic equipment and materials to participants attending most courses if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be an additional charge for clay and firing of any oversized work, please refer to the tutor for guidance. Who teaches this course? Wendy Tournay

Thu 13 Jan

£186 (£169)

Thu 20 Jan

£186 (£169)

Thu 27 Jan

£186 (£169)

Thu 3 Feb

£186 (£169)

Thu 10 Feb

£186 (£169)

Thu 17 Feb

£186 (£169)

Thu 3 Mar

£186 (£169)

Thu 10 Mar

£186 (£169)

Thu 17 Mar

£186 (£169)

Thu 24 Mar

£186 (£169)

Thu 31 Mar

£186 (£169)

Thu 7 Apr

£186 (£169)

Introduction to Ceramics (CE02 Summer)

Learn basic making techniques in clay including coiling, throwing and slab pots. Take home a finished piece and an understanding of the art of clay and ceramics. What will you learn on this course? In this weekly class you will receive an introduction to ceramics and the hand-building techniques used. Your tutor will demonstrate a range of techniques throughout the course such as coiling, slab-building, throwing and press-moulding. There will also be demonstrations of different approaches to glazing to achieve a variety of surface effects, this will include dipping, pouring, spraying and the use of wax resist. You will have the opportunity to work with coloured slips which allows for a more controlled outcome. The tutor will give whole class demonstrations of the various techniques in the early stages of the course and then individual, specialist guidance will be given on your projects as and when it’s needed. You will be able to work at your own pace and encouraged to work on individual projects of your own design. Further demonstrations of specific techniques can also be given to smaller numbers within the group or one-to-one upon request. Those learners with more experience will be able to self-direct their work and the tutor will offer guidance as and when it’s needed. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kiln. On completion of this course you will have gained a variety of practical ceramics skills and learned new techniques through the development of individual pieces or a collection of work. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to all levels. You don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC can provide basic equipment and materials to participants attending most courses if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be an additional charge for clay and firing of any oversized work, please refer to the tutor for guidance. Who teaches this course? Wendy Tournay

Thu 28 Apr

£176 (£159)

Thu 5 May

£176 (£159)

Thu 12 May

£176 (£159)

Thu 19 May

£176 (£159)

Thu 26 May

£176 (£159)

Thu 9 Jun

£176 (£159)

Thu 16 Jun

£176 (£159)

Thu 23 Jun

£176 (£159)

Thu 30 Jun

£176 (£159)

Thu 7 Jul

£176 (£159)

Thu 14 Jul

£176 (£159)

Thu 21 Jul

£176 (£159)

Introduction to Ceramics (CE08 Spring)

Learn basic making techniques in clay including coiling, throwing and slab pots. Take home a finished piece and an understanding of the art of clay and ceramics. What will you learn on this course? In this weekly class you will receive an introduction to ceramics and the hand-building techniques used. Your tutor will demonstrate a range of techniques throughout the course such as coiling, slab-building, throwing and press-moulding. There will also be demonstrations of different approaches to glazing to achieve a variety of surface effects, this will include dipping, pouring, spraying and the use of wax resist. You will have the opportunity to work with coloured slips which allows for a more controlled outcome. The tutor will give whole class demonstrations of the various techniques in the early stages of the course and then individual, specialist guidance will be given on your projects as and when it’s needed. You will be able to work at your own pace and encouraged to work on individual projects of your own design. Further demonstrations of specific techniques can also be given to smaller numbers within the group or one-to-one upon request. Those learners with more experience will be able to self-direct their work and the tutor will offer guidance as and when it’s needed. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kiln. On completion of this course you will have gained a variety of practical ceramics skills and learned new techniques through the development of individual pieces or a collection of work. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to all levels. You don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC can provide equipment and materials for participants, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own tools where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be an additional charge for clay and firing of any oversized work, please refer to the tutor for guidance. Who teaches this course? Emily Wilcox

Wed 12 Jan

£176 (£159)

Wed 19 Jan

£176 (£159)

Wed 26 Jan

£176 (£159)

Wed 2 Feb

£176 (£159)

Wed 9 Feb

£176 (£159)

Wed 16 Feb

£176 (£159)

Wed 2 Mar

£176 (£159)

Wed 9 Mar

£176 (£159)

Wed 16 Mar

£176 (£159)

Wed 23 Mar

£176 (£159)

Wed 30 Mar

£176 (£159)

Wed 6 Apr

£176 (£159)

Introduction to Ceramics (CE08 Summer)

Learn basic making techniques in clay including coiling, throwing and slab pots. Take home a finished piece and an understanding of the art of clay and ceramics. What will you learn on this course? In this weekly class you will receive an introduction to ceramics and the hand-building techniques used. Your tutor will demonstrate a range of techniques throughout the course such as coiling, slab-building, throwing and press-moulding. There will also be demonstrations of different approaches to glazing to achieve a variety of surface effects, this will include dipping, pouring, spraying and the use of wax resist. You will have the opportunity to work with coloured slips which allows for a more controlled outcome. The tutor will give whole class demonstrations of the various techniques in the early stages of the course and then individual, specialist guidance will be given on your projects as and when it’s needed. You will be able to work at your own pace and encouraged to work on individual projects of your own design. Further demonstrations of specific techniques can also be given to smaller numbers within the group or one-to-one upon request. Those learners with more experience will be able to self-direct their work and the tutor will offer guidance as and when it’s needed. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kiln. On completion of this course you will have gained a variety of practical ceramics skills and learned new techniques through the development of individual pieces or a collection of work. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to all levels. You don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC can provide equipment and materials for participants, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own tools where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be an additional charge for clay and firing of any oversized work, please refer to the tutor for guidance. Who teaches this course? Emily Wilcox

Wed 27 Apr

£176 (£159)

Wed 4 May

£176 (£159)

Wed 11 May

£176 (£159)

Wed 18 May

£176 (£159)

Wed 25 May

£176 (£159)

Wed 8 Jun

£176 (£159)

Wed 15 Jun

£176 (£159)

Wed 22 Jun

£176 (£159)

Wed 29 Jun

£176 (£159)

Wed 6 Jul

£176 (£159)

Wed 13 Jul

£176 (£159)

Wed 20 Jul

£176 (£159)

Introduction to Ceramics (CE106 Spring)

Learn basic making techniques in clay including coiling, throwing and slab pots. Take home a finished piece and an understanding of the art of clay and ceramics. What will you learn on this course? In this weekly class you will receive an introduction to ceramics and the hand-building techniques used. Your tutor will demonstrate a range of techniques throughout the course such as coiling, slab-building, throwing and press-moulding. There will also be demonstrations of different approaches to glazing to achieve a variety of surface effects, this will include dipping, pouring, spraying and the use of wax resist. You will have the opportunity to work with coloured slips which allows for a more controlled outcome. The tutor will give whole class demonstrations of the various techniques in the early stages of the course and then individual, specialist guidance will be given on your projects as and when it’s needed. You will be able to work at your own pace and encouraged to work on individual projects of your own design. Further demonstrations of specific techniques can also be given to smaller numbers within the group or one-to-one upon request. Those learners with more experience will be able to self-direct their work and the tutor will offer guidance as and when it’s needed. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kiln. On completion of this course you will have gained a variety of practical ceramics skills and learned new techniques through the development of individual pieces or a collection of work. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to all levels. You don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC will provide equipment and materials for participants, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own tools where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note there will be an additional charge for clay and firing of oversized work, please refer to the tutor for guidance. Who teaches this course? Libby Gillies

Thu 13 Jan

£202 (£183)

Thu 20 Jan

£202 (£183)

Thu 27 Jan

£202 (£183)

Thu 3 Feb

£202 (£183)

Thu 10 Feb

£202 (£183)

Thu 17 Feb

£202 (£183)

Thu 3 Mar

£202 (£183)

Thu 10 Mar

£202 (£183)

Thu 17 Mar

£202 (£183)

Thu 24 Mar

£202 (£183)

Thu 31 Mar

£202 (£183)

Thu 7 Apr

£202 (£183)

Introduction to Ceramics (CE106 Summer)

Learn basic making techniques in clay including coiling, throwing and slab pots. Take home a finished piece and an understanding of the art of clay and ceramics. What will you learn on this course? In this weekly class you will receive an introduction to ceramics and the hand-building techniques used. Your tutor will demonstrate a range of techniques throughout the course such as coiling, slab-building, throwing and press-moulding. There will also be demonstrations of different approaches to glazing to achieve a variety of surface effects, this will include dipping, pouring, spraying and the use of wax resist. You will have the opportunity to work with coloured slips which allows for a more controlled outcome. The tutor will give whole class demonstrations of the various techniques in the early stages of the course and then individual, specialist guidance will be given on your projects as and when it’s needed. You will be able to work at your own pace and encouraged to work on individual projects of your own design. Further demonstrations of specific techniques can also be given to smaller numbers within the group or one-to-one upon request. Those learners with more experience will be able to self-direct their work and the tutor will offer guidance as and when it’s needed. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kiln. On completion of this course you will have gained a variety of practical ceramics skills and learned new techniques through the development of individual pieces or a collection of work. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to all levels. You don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC will provide equipment and materials for participants, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own tools where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note there will be an additional charge for clay and firing of oversized work, please refer to the tutor for guidance. Who teaches this course? Libby Gillies

Thu 28 Apr

£192 (£173)

Thu 5 May

£192 (£173)

Thu 12 May

£192 (£173)

Thu 19 May

£192 (£173)

Thu 26 May

£192 (£173)

Thu 9 Jun

£192 (£173)

Thu 16 Jun

£192 (£173)

Thu 23 Jun

£192 (£173)

Thu 30 Jun

£192 (£173)

Thu 7 Jul

£192 (£173)

Thu 14 Jul

£192 (£173)

Thu 21 Jul

£192 (£173)

Introduction to Ceramics (CE109 Spring)

Interested in making your own ceramics but not sure where to start? Learn the basics of clay in this course, take home a finished piece and an understanding of the art of clay and ceramics. What will you learn on this course? In this weekly class you will receive an introduction to ceramics and the hand-building techniques used. The tutor will demonstrate a range of techniques throughout the course such as coiling, slab-building, throwing, and press-moulding. You will learn about glazing and get the chance to experiment with different approaches to achieve a variety of surface effects, including dipping, pouring, spraying, and the use of wax resist. You will also have the opportunity to work with coloured slips to allow for a more controlled outcome. Within the course you will get the chance to explore the results of firing in a gas kiln and an electric kiln to produce different results. The tutor will give whole class demonstrations of the various techniques at the start of the course. Individual, specialist guidance will be given on your projects as and when needed. You will be able to work at your own pace and be encouraged to work on individual projects of your own design. Further demonstrations of specific techniques can also be given to smaller numbers within the group or one-to-one upon request. Those learners with more experience will be able to self-direct their work and the tutor can offer guidance when required. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all the necessary tools and the firing kiln. On completion of this course you will have gained a variety of practical ceramics skills and learned new techniques through the development of individual pieces or a collection of work. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. It is open to all levels, no experience is needed as full instruction and guidance will be provided. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to work independently with tutor support as needed. The course is accessible for people with disabilities. A support worker or carer may assist; carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific accessibility needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC will provide equipment and materials for participants. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be an additional charge for clay and firing of oversized work – please refer to the tutor for guidance. Who teaches this course? Libby Gilles

Sat 15 Jan

£192 (£173)

Sat 22 Jan

£192 (£173)

Sat 29 Jan

£192 (£173)

Sat 5 Feb

£192 (£173)

Sat 12 Feb

£192 (£173)

Sat 19 Feb

£192 (£173)

Sat 5 Mar

£192 (£173)

Sat 12 Mar

£192 (£173)

Sat 19 Mar

£192 (£173)

Sat 26 Mar

£192 (£173)

Sat 2 Apr

£192 (£173)

Sat 9 Apr

£192 (£173)

Introduction to Ceramics (CE109 Summer)

Interested in making your own ceramics but not sure where to start? Learn the basics of clay in this course, take home a finished piece and an understanding of the art of clay and ceramics. What will you learn on this course? In this weekly class you will receive an introduction to ceramics and the hand-building techniques used. The tutor will demonstrate a range of techniques throughout the course such as coiling, slab-building, throwing, and press-moulding. You will learn about glazing and get the chance to experiment with different approaches to achieve a variety of surface effects, including dipping, pouring, spraying, and the use of wax resist. You will also have the opportunity to work with coloured slips to allow for a more controlled outcome. Within the course you will get the chance to explore the results of firing in a gas kiln and an electric kiln to produce different results. The tutor will give whole class demonstrations of the various techniques at the start of the course. Individual, specialist guidance will be given on your projects as and when needed. You will be able to work at your own pace and be encouraged to work on individual projects of your own design. Further demonstrations of specific techniques can also be given to smaller numbers within the group or one-to-one upon request. Those learners with more experience will be able to self-direct their work and the tutor can offer guidance when required. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all the necessary tools and the firing kiln. On completion of this course you will have gained a variety of practical ceramics skills and learned new techniques through the development of individual pieces or a collection of work. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. It is open to all levels, no experience is needed as full instruction and guidance will be provided. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to work independently with tutor support as needed. The course is accessible for people with disabilities. A support worker or carer may assist; carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific accessibility needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC will provide equipment and materials for participants. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be an additional charge for clay and firing of oversized work – please refer to the tutor for guidance. Who teaches this course? Libby Gilles

Sat 30 Apr

£192 (£173)

Sat 7 May

£192 (£173)

Sat 14 May

£192 (£173)

Sat 21 May

£192 (£173)

Sat 28 May

£192 (£173)

Sat 11 Jun

£192 (£173)

Sat 18 Jun

£192 (£173)

Sat 25 Jun

£192 (£173)

Sat 2 Jul

£192 (£173)

Sat 9 Jul

£192 (£173)

Sat 16 Jul

£192 (£173)

Sat 23 Jul

£192 (£173)

Introduction to Ceramics Weekend

Always wanted to try ceramics? During this new weekend course you will learn hand building techniques including traditional coiling and slab building and produce a ceramic vessel, garden planter or sculpture. What will you learn on this course? Develop your skills through the use of traditional coiling or slab building techniques, to produce a ceramic vessel, garden planter or sculpture. You will have the opportunity to explore surface decoration through in-relief modelling, pattern and texture whilst working towards your finished outcome. Your own designs and ideas will be encouraged to enable you to find your personal working style. You will be guided through a number of tutor-led demos and set tasks which will introduce particular tips and techniques in order for you to The course will cover the following skills and techniques: • how to successfully develop 2d designs into 3d objects • construction techniques • understanding of the materials and different stages of making • options for design, building, and quality of finish • in-relief modelling, imprinted texture and slip decoration In addition there will be opportunity to discuss ideas and intentions with the group and you will receive support in developing your own independent artistic style. The tutor will develop a guided programme of study with the group providing demonstrations and one-to-one support as required. You are encouraged to develop your own ideas, use of a personal sketchbook is encouraged to enable the development of ideas, and of the student’s own working style. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, glazes, all necessary tools and the firing kiln. On completion of this course you will have broadened your ceramics skills and learned new techniques for the realisation of your own design. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginner level students. The course is accessible for people with disabilities who have the relevant ceramics experience and a support worker or carer may assist if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? You don’t need to bring anything. All materials and equipment is provided. Are there any additional costs? The course price includes all materials and firing of your work unless the particular pieces you wish to work on are oversized when an additional charge will be made. Please discuss with the tutor. Who teaches this course? Emily-Kriste Wilcox

Sat 18 Dec

£84 (£76)

Introduction to Constructed Textiles (TE108 Spring)

In this course you will learn how to make constructed textiles, through carding and spinning, peg and pin loom weaving, felting, macrame, crochet and knitting.

What will you learn on this course? This course aims to introduce you to the wonderful world of constructed textiles, from learning how to make your own yarn to different processes and skills to make your own fabulous, constructed textile pieces of your own design. You will be taught the basic skills in fibre processing, gaining a knowledge of different types of fibre and their properties and the historical and global context of various constructed textiles. You will learn how to transform raw fibre into yarn, through carding, roving and spinning, using drop spindles. You will have the opportunity to apply your new skills to produce decorative pieces for a wall hanging or mat or even a cushion cover. The course is delivered through a mix of demonstrations and practical exercises. You will leave with some fibre samples and some more developed decorative pieces. From spring 2022 the course will include weaving with tabletop looms.

Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. You do not need any previous experience of working with fibres as full instruction and guidance is given. Those with some experience will be able to improve their skills, technique and develop new designs. Some dexterity is needed in your hands and shoulders for this course, but most projects can be adapted to suit specific needs. Do contact us to discuss your specific situation. A carer or support worker may assist but must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support.

Do you need to bring anything? All materials and equipment are provided, however you may wish to purchase your own items such as a drop spindle, crochet hook, knitting needles to practise in between sessions. Supplier information will be given in the sessions. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Penny Dixon

Fri 14 Jan
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 21 Jan
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 28 Jan
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 4 Feb
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 11 Feb
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 18 Feb
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 4 Mar
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 11 Mar
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 18 Mar
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 25 Mar
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 1 Apr
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 8 Apr
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Introduction to Constructed Textiles (TE108 Summer)

In this course you will learn how to make constructed textiles, through carding and spinning, peg and pin loom weaving, felting, macrame, crochet and knitting.

What will you learn on this course? This course aims to introduce you to the wonderful world of constructed textiles, from learning how to make your own yarn to different processes and skills to make your own fabulous, constructed textile pieces of your own design. You will be taught the basic skills in fibre processing, gaining a knowledge of different types of fibre and their properties and the historical and global context of various constructed textiles. You will learn how to transform raw fibre into yarn, through carding, roving and spinning, using drop spindles. You will have the opportunity to apply your new skills to produce decorative pieces for a wall hanging or mat or even a cushion cover. The course is delivered through a mix of demonstrations and practical exercises. You will leave with some fibre samples and some more developed decorative pieces. From spring 2022 the course will include weaving with tabletop looms.

Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. You do not need any previous experience of working with fibres as full instruction and guidance is given. Those with some experience will be able to improve their skills, technique and develop new designs. Some dexterity is needed in your hands and shoulders for this course, but most projects can be adapted to suit specific needs. Do contact us to discuss your specific situation. A carer or support worker may assist but must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support.

Do you need to bring anything? All materials and equipment are provided, however you may wish to purchase your own items such as a drop spindle, crochet hook, knitting needles to practise in between sessions. Supplier information will be given in the sessions. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Penny Dixon

Fri 29 Apr
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 6 May
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 13 May
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 20 May
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 27 May
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 10 Jun
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 17 Jun
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 24 Jun
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 1 Jul
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 8 Jul
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 15 Jul
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Fri 22 Jul
Textiles Studio

£143 (£129)

Introduction to Digital Music Technology (DM103 Spring)

Learn basic making techniques in clay including coiling, throwing and slab pots. Take home a finished piece and an understanding of the art of clay and ceramics. What will you learn on this course? In this weekly class you will receive an introduction to ceramics and the hand-building techniques used. Your tutor will demonstrate a range of techniques throughout the course such as coiling, slab-building, throwing and press-moulding. There will also be demonstrations of different approaches to glazing to achieve a variety of surface effects, this will include dipping, pouring, spraying and the use of wax resist. You will have the opportunity to work with coloured slips which allows for a more controlled outcome. The tutor will give whole class demonstrations of the various techniques in the early stages of the course and then individual, specialist guidance will be given on your projects as and when it’s needed. You will be able to work at your own pace and encouraged to work on individual projects of your own design. Further demonstrations of specific techniques can also be given to smaller numbers within the group or one-to-one upon request. Those learners with more experience will be able to self-direct their work and the tutor will offer guidance as and when it’s needed. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kiln. On completion of this course you will have gained a variety of practical ceramics skills and learned new techniques through the development of individual pieces or a collection of work. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to all levels. You don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC will provide equipment and materials for participants, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own tools where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note there will be an additional charge for clay and firing of oversized work, please refer to the tutor for guidance. Who teaches this course? Barbara Pianca

Tue 11 Jan
Media Studio

£158 (£143)

Tue 18 Jan
Media Studio

£158 (£143)

Tue 25 Jan
Media Studio

£158 (£143)

Tue 1 Feb
Media Studio

£158 (£143)

Tue 8 Feb
Media Studio

£158 (£143)

Tue 15 Feb
Media Studio

£158 (£143)

Tue 1 Mar
Media Studio

£158 (£143)

Tue 8 Mar
Media Studio

£158 (£143)

Tue 15 Mar
Media Studio

£158 (£143)

Tue 22 Mar
Media Studio

£158 (£143)

Tue 29 Mar
Media Studio

£158 (£143)

Tue 5 Apr
Media Studio

£158 (£143)

Introduction to Digital Music Technology (DM103 Summer)

Learn basic making techniques in clay including coiling, throwing and slab pots. Take home a finished piece and an understanding of the art of clay and ceramics. What will you learn on this course? In this weekly class you will receive an introduction to ceramics and the hand-building techniques used. Your tutor will demonstrate a range of techniques throughout the course such as coiling, slab-building, throwing and press-moulding. There will also be demonstrations of different approaches to glazing to achieve a variety of surface effects, this will include dipping, pouring, spraying and the use of wax resist. You will have the opportunity to work with coloured slips which allows for a more controlled outcome. The tutor will give whole class demonstrations of the various techniques in the early stages of the course and then individual, specialist guidance will be given on your projects as and when it’s needed. You will be able to work at your own pace and encouraged to work on individual projects of your own design. Further demonstrations of specific techniques can also be given to smaller numbers within the group or one-to-one upon request. Those learners with more experience will be able to self-direct their work and the tutor will offer guidance as and when it’s needed. Our fully equipped studio will give you access to various stoneware clays, pottery wheel, glazes, coloured slips, all necessary tools and the firing kiln. On completion of this course you will have gained a variety of practical ceramics skills and learned new techniques through the development of individual pieces or a collection of work. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to all levels. You don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. Those experienced in ceramics are welcome to work independently with tutor guidance and support given as needed. The course is accessible for people with disabilities as a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? MAC will provide equipment and materials for participants, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own tools where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note there will be an additional charge for clay and firing of oversized work, please refer to the tutor for guidance. Who teaches this course? Barbara Pianca

Tue 26 Apr
Media Studio

£158 (£143)

Tue 3 May
Media Studio

£158 (£143)

Tue 10 May
Media Studio

£158 (£143)

Tue 17 May
Media Studio

£158 (£143)

Tue 24 May
Media Studio

£158 (£143)

Tue 7 Jun
Media Studio

£158 (£143)

Tue 14 Jun
Media Studio

£158 (£143)

Tue 21 Jun
Media Studio

£158 (£143)

Tue 28 Jun
Media Studio

£158 (£143)

Tue 5 Jul
Media Studio

£158 (£143)

Tue 12 Jul
Media Studio

£158 (£143)

Tue 19 Jul
Media Studio

£158 (£143)

Introduction to Filmmaking (DM10 Spring)

Learn the techniques of film making and develop your own ideas working with professional artist and filmmaker Martin McNally What will you learn on this course? This course will teach you all the necessary skills to make a short film. You will experience the entire process from developing ideas, writing a script, producing, directing, filming and editing. You will work with MAC’s professional Sony cameras and specialist sound recording equipment and learn to edit your film on Apple Mac computers in MAC’s dedicated media studio. The classes are taught through demonstrations and guidance from the tutor, and through hands on experience or learning by doing. You will work in small groups so this course is also a great way to build your confidence and people skills while meeting like-minded people.   The course usually consists of making a trailer for a film followed by a short drama and/or a short documentary film. On completing this course you can expect to have developed your confidence in and understanding of the film making process and produced your own short film. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. It is suitable for those who are completely new to film making and those with some existing skills, including those who have attended this course before. The course is accessible for people with disabilities. The room is wheelchair accessible and a carer or support worker may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Students should bring a usb stick or portable drive with plenty of storage in order to take their projects home.  MAC cameras and computers are provided whilst on site only. If you wish to film off-site you will need your own equipment. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs.  Who teaches this course? Martin McNally

Wed 12 Jan
Media Studio

£149 (£135)

Wed 19 Jan
Media Studio

£149 (£135)

Wed 26 Jan
Media Studio

£149 (£135)

Wed 2 Feb
Media Studio

£149 (£135)

Wed 9 Feb
Media Studio

£149 (£135)

Wed 16 Feb
Media Studio

£149 (£135)

Wed 2 Mar
Media Studio

£149 (£135)

Wed 9 Mar
Media Studio

£149 (£135)

Wed 16 Mar
Media Studio

£149 (£135)

Wed 23 Mar
Media Studio

£149 (£135)

Wed 30 Mar
Media Studio

£149 (£135)

Wed 6 Apr
Media Studio

£149 (£135)

Introduction to Filmmaking (DM10 Summer)

Learn the techniques of film making and develop your own ideas working with professional artist and filmmaker Martin McNally What will you learn on this course? This course will teach you all the necessary skills to make a short film. You will experience the entire process from developing ideas, writing a script, producing, directing, filming and editing. You will work with MAC’s professional Sony cameras and specialist sound recording equipment and learn to edit your film on Apple Mac computers in MAC’s dedicated media studio. The classes are taught through demonstrations and guidance from the tutor, and through hands on experience or learning by doing. You will work in small groups so this course is also a great way to build your confidence and people skills while meeting like-minded people.   The course usually consists of making a trailer for a film followed by a short drama and/or a short documentary film. On completing this course you can expect to have developed your confidence in and understanding of the film making process and produced your own short film. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. It is suitable for those who are completely new to film making and those with some existing skills, including those who have attended this course before. The course is accessible for people with disabilities. The room is wheelchair accessible and a carer or support worker may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Students should bring a usb stick or portable drive with plenty of storage in order to take their projects home.  MAC cameras and computers are provided whilst on site only. If you wish to film off-site you will need your own equipment. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs.  Who teaches this course? Martin McNally

Wed 27 Apr
Media Studio

£149 (£135)

Wed 4 May
Media Studio

£149 (£135)

Wed 11 May
Media Studio

£149 (£135)

Wed 18 May
Media Studio

£149 (£135)

Wed 25 May
Media Studio

£149 (£135)

Wed 8 Jun
Media Studio

£149 (£135)

Wed 15 Jun
Media Studio

£149 (£135)

Wed 22 Jun
Media Studio

£149 (£135)

Wed 29 Jun
Media Studio

£149 (£135)

Wed 6 Jul
Media Studio

£149 (£135)

Wed 13 Jul
Media Studio

£149 (£135)

Wed 20 Jul
Media Studio

£149 (£135)

Introduction to Illustration Techniques (VA46 Spring)

Learn traditional and digital illustration techniques whilst working on your own illustrations and exploring the medium.

What will you learn on this course?

On this course you will be introduced to traditional and digital illustration techniques when working with written texts and new concepts.

To create your own narrative images, you will explore the entire process from text and concept to drawings and finished illustrations. The course will cover the following topics: • Drawing with pencil, pen and ink • Drawing using graphics tablets and creative suites • Colour studies and techniques • Perspectives • The human form • Compositions and thumbnails • Interpreting text and creating visual narratives • Concept artwork and developing ideas • Personal work vs working on large-scale projects • Illustration for growth and change

The principles of practice, theory and experimentation will be used to both introduce illustration techniques and encourage a strong foundation for further work: each topic will be introduced through demonstrations, practice and observational drawing; the theory behind the techniques will be discussed alongside the work of other illustrators, such as Will Eisner, Jean Giraud (a.k.a. Moebius), Osamu Tezuka, Gustav Dore, Walt Stanchfield, Katsuhiro Otomo, and many others; personal exploration of your own ideas will be encouraged with signposting to more advanced resources that may prove helpful.

On completion of this course, you can expect to have completed your own illustrations and to have developed a range of techniques to approach future illustrations.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to learners of all levels. Beginners who have no illustration experience will be taught the basics. Students with previous drawing and painting experience can develop their skills further and learn traditional illustration.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can undertake practical drawing activities. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs.

Do you need to bring anything? Facilities are available to work in both traditional and digital mediums during the course, however you may want to bring your own materials if they are preferred.

The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day, such as paints, pencils, graphite sticks, erasers, sharpeners.

MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission.

Computers will be available when working digitally, including graphics tablets and creative suites.

Are there any additional costs?

Any additional materials are provided at your own expense.

Who teaches this course?

James Dawson

Tue 11 Jan
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Tue 18 Jan
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Tue 25 Jan
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Tue 1 Feb
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Tue 8 Feb
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Tue 15 Feb
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Tue 22 Feb
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Tue 1 Mar
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Tue 8 Mar
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Tue 15 Mar
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Tue 22 Mar
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Tue 29 Mar
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Tue 5 Apr
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Introduction to Illustration Techniques (VA46 Summer)

Learn traditional and digital illustration techniques whilst working on your own illustrations and exploring the medium.

What will you learn on this course?

On this course you will be introduced to traditional and digital illustration techniques when working with written texts and new concepts.

To create your own narrative images, you will explore the entire process from text and concept to drawings and finished illustrations. The course will cover the following topics: • Drawing with pencil, pen and ink • Drawing using graphics tablets and creative suites • Colour studies and techniques • Perspectives • The human form • Compositions and thumbnails • Interpreting text and creating visual narratives • Concept artwork and developing ideas • Personal work vs working on large-scale projects • Illustration for growth and change

The principles of practice, theory and experimentation will be used to both introduce illustration techniques and encourage a strong foundation for further work: each topic will be introduced through demonstrations, practice and observational drawing; the theory behind the techniques will be discussed alongside the work of other illustrators, such as Will Eisner, Jean Giraud (a.k.a. Moebius), Osamu Tezuka, Gustav Dore, Walt Stanchfield, Katsuhiro Otomo, and many others; personal exploration of your own ideas will be encouraged with signposting to more advanced resources that may prove helpful.

On completion of this course, you can expect to have completed your own illustrations and to have developed a range of techniques to approach future illustrations.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to learners of all levels. Beginners who have no illustration experience will be taught the basics. Students with previous drawing and painting experience can develop their skills further and learn traditional illustration.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can undertake practical drawing activities. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs.

Do you need to bring anything? Facilities are available to work in both traditional and digital mediums during the course, however you may want to bring your own materials if they are preferred.

The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day, such as paints, pencils, graphite sticks, erasers, sharpeners.

MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission.

Computers will be available when working digitally, including graphics tablets and creative suites.

Are there any additional costs?

Any additional materials are provided at your own expense.

Who teaches this course?

James Dawson

Tue 26 Apr
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Tue 3 May
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Tue 10 May
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Tue 17 May
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Tue 24 May
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Tue 7 Jun
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Tue 14 Jun
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Tue 21 Jun
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Tue 28 Jun
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Tue 5 Jul
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Tue 12 Jul
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Tue 19 Jul
Weston Studio

£142 (£128)

Introduction to Improv (PE102 Spring)

Are you a comedy aficionado? Do you love “Whose Line is it Anyway?” Are you a fan of Amy Poehler? Tina Fey? Mike Myers? Keegan-Michael Key? (They all came through improv.) Then this is the course for you. What will you learn on this course? This is a 12-week beginners’ course to learn the core skills of improvised comedy.

Discover the joy, freedom, and challenge of Improv. Learn to be more creative and more playful. Low-pressure, high-enjoyment classes in a fun, friendly, supportive, and stress-free environment.

Complete beginners are welcome. You do not need any drama, acting, comedy or improv experience whatsoever. You do not have to be clever, fast or funny either. Also good for writers, actors and comedians looking to widen their skills. Even good for introverts!

Improv is not the same as stand-up; you are not alone on stage and it's not about telling jokes. It is about working together as a team with other improvisers to spontaneously create group stories, scenes & sketches. There’s no such thing as failure in improv!

Over a course of 12 weekly workshops you’ll progress as a team while learning core improvisation skills like Spontaneity, Listening, Yes And Character, Scenes, Story and Status. With the chance to perform in an end-of-term show! Run by Jon Trevor, founder and leader of Box of Frogs, director of the Birmingham Improv Festival. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners. You do not need any previous comedy experience as full instruction and guidance is given. The course is accessible for people with disabilities. Students can be accompanied by a support worker or a carer if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Do you need to bring anything? No Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Jon Trevor, Box of Frogs

Thu 13 Jan
Deloitte Room

£115 (£104)

Thu 20 Jan
Deloitte Room

£115 (£104)

Thu 27 Jan
Deloitte Room

£115 (£104)

Thu 3 Feb
Deloitte Room

£115 (£104)

Thu 10 Feb
Deloitte Room

£115 (£104)

Thu 17 Feb
Deloitte Room

£115 (£104)

Thu 3 Mar
Deloitte Room

£115 (£104)

Thu 10 Mar
Deloitte Room

£115 (£104)

Thu 17 Mar
Deloitte Room

£115 (£104)

Thu 24 Mar
Deloitte Room

£115 (£104)

Thu 31 Mar
Deloitte Room

£115 (£104)

Thu 7 Apr
Deloitte Room

£115 (£104)

Introduction to Improv (PE102 Summer)

Are you a comedy aficionado? Do you love “Whose Line is it Anyway?” Are you a fan of Amy Poehler? Tina Fey? Mike Myers? Keegan-Michael Key? (They all came through improv.) Then this is the course for you. What will you learn on this course? This is a 12-week beginners’ course to learn the core skills of improvised comedy.

Discover the joy, freedom, and challenge of Improv. Learn to be more creative and more playful. Low-pressure, high-enjoyment classes in a fun, friendly, supportive, and stress-free environment.

Complete beginners are welcome. You do not need any drama, acting, comedy or improv experience whatsoever. You do not have to be clever, fast or funny either. Also good for writers, actors and comedians looking to widen their skills. Even good for introverts!

Improv is not the same as stand-up; you are not alone on stage and it's not about telling jokes. It is about working together as a team with other improvisers to spontaneously create group stories, scenes & sketches. There’s no such thing as failure in improv!

Over a course of 12 weekly workshops you’ll progress as a team while learning core improvisation skills like Spontaneity, Listening, Yes And Character, Scenes, Story and Status. With the chance to perform in an end-of-term show! Run by Jon Trevor, founder and leader of Box of Frogs, director of the Birmingham Improv Festival. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners. You do not need any previous comedy experience as full instruction and guidance is given. The course is accessible for people with disabilities. Students can be accompanied by a support worker or a carer if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Do you need to bring anything? No Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? Jon Trevor, Box of Frogs

Thu 28 Apr
Deloitte Room

£115 (£104)

Thu 5 May
Deloitte Room

£115 (£104)

Thu 12 May
Deloitte Room

£115 (£104)

Thu 19 May
Deloitte Room

£115 (£104)

Thu 26 May
Deloitte Room

£115 (£104)

Thu 9 Jun
Deloitte Room

£115 (£104)

Thu 16 Jun
Deloitte Room

£115 (£104)

Thu 23 Jun
Deloitte Room

£115 (£104)

Thu 30 Jun
Deloitte Room

£115 (£104)

Thu 7 Jul
Deloitte Room

£115 (£104)

Thu 14 Jul
Deloitte Room

£115 (£104)

Thu 21 Jul
Deloitte Room

£115 (£104)

Introduction to Jewellery (JE03 Spring)

Learn basic techniques, including soldering, saw piercing and filing and make jewellery from your own designs. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn the skills necessary to design and make your own unique pieces of jewellery. The materials used are copper, brass, gilding metal and sterling silver. You will be taught a range of traditional jewellery making skills and techniques including: • Sawing and cutting out metals • soldering to join metals • polishing and buffing • forming • casting techniques • vitreous enamelling • finishing processes These techniques will be taught through a series of exercises such as: • Making a simple ring to a set design • Making a pendant to your own design • Making and enamelling a piece of jewellery to your own design The first exercise will be intensively supported but as you gain skills and confidence you will be supported to develop your own designs and encouraged to work independently.
MAC’s fully equipped studio has work benches, a soldering hearth and torch, enamelling kiln, polishing motor and various hand tools which the tutor will teach you to use safely and correctly. On completing the course you will have gained confidence in basic bench skills, developed your fine motor skills and hand eye coordination, and have several pieces of jewellery you have designed and made to wear or give to friends and family. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. This is a beginners course so you do not need to have any jewellery making experience to attend this course. If you have some previous experience such as making beaded jewellery or some other basic procedures and would like to develop your skills further, learn some new techniques with the tutor’s support and guidance, you are welcome to attend this course. The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dexterity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair accessible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor. MAC will provide equipment for participants, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own tools where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. You will need to purchase materials for the jewellery you wish to make as below.
Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from MAC individually or in packs e.g. Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades) Silver - £1.30 per gram 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10
Saw blades (x12) - £2.60 Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet Who teaches this course? Chloe Minihane Slater

Wed 12 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Wed 19 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Wed 26 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Wed 2 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Wed 9 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Wed 16 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Wed 2 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Wed 9 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Wed 16 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Wed 23 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Wed 30 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Wed 6 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Introduction to Jewellery (JE03 Summer)

Learn basic techniques, including soldering, saw piercing and filing and make jewellery from your own designs. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn the skills necessary to design and make your own unique pieces of jewellery. The materials used are copper, brass, gilding metal and sterling silver. You will be taught a range of traditional jewellery making skills and techniques including: • Sawing and cutting out metals • soldering to join metals • polishing and buffing • forming • casting techniques • vitreous enamelling • finishing processes These techniques will be taught through a series of exercises such as: • Making a simple ring to a set design • Making a pendant to your own design • Making and enamelling a piece of jewellery to your own design The first exercise will be intensively supported but as you gain skills and confidence you will be supported to develop your own designs and encouraged to work independently.
MAC’s fully equipped studio has work benches, a soldering hearth and torch, enamelling kiln, polishing motor and various hand tools which the tutor will teach you to use safely and correctly. On completing the course you will have gained confidence in basic bench skills, developed your fine motor skills and hand eye coordination, and have several pieces of jewellery you have designed and made to wear or give to friends and family. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. This is a beginners course so you do not need to have any jewellery making experience to attend this course. If you have some previous experience such as making beaded jewellery or some other basic procedures and would like to develop your skills further, learn some new techniques with the tutor’s support and guidance, you are welcome to attend this course. The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dexterity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair accessible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor. MAC will provide equipment for participants, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own tools where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. You will need to purchase materials for the jewellery you wish to make as below.
Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from MAC individually or in packs e.g. Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades) Silver - £1.30 per gram 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10
Saw blades (x12) - £2.60 Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet Who teaches this course? Chloe Minihane Slater

Wed 27 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Wed 4 May
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Wed 11 May
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Wed 18 May
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Wed 25 May
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Wed 8 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Wed 15 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Wed 22 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Wed 29 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Wed 6 Jul
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Wed 13 Jul
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Wed 20 Jul
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Introduction to Mosaics (CE104 Spring)

Learn the art of creating beautiful mosaics in this practical course.

What will you learn on this course? This course will teach you the fundamental principles and introduce you to the world of mosaics, providing you with skills, knowledge and confidence to create your own mosaics at home. This is also an introductory course that will prepare you to continue learning other mosaic techniques as part of our new programme of mosaic courses.

We will teach you how to: - create a drawing or design in preparation for making a mosaic - Utilise tile cutters to cut and shape ceramic (or glass if applicable) tiles for mosaic - Understand and apply the direct method for mosaic making - Apply movement or flow to your mosaic, known as mosaic ‘andamento’ - Fix your mosaic tiles onto a wooden board using the correct adhesive - Complete your work with grout, clean and polish it to take home with you.

Think about a design idea and bring your printed images with you and/or any drawings to the first class. Alternatively design templates will be also available.

The mosaic projects you will work on will be within the following dimensions 21cmx29cm or 30cmx30cm dependent on the design.

Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. This is a practical mosaic course aimed at complete beginners but all levels are welcome. Learners will be introduced to this subject whilst Improvers and advanced students will be guided in their projects, The course is accessible for people with disabilities who have the relevant mosaic or ceramics experience and a support worker or carer may assist if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Bring any images and design ideas with you. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and equipment. Who teaches this course? Paula Ligo

Wed 12 Jan

£178 (£161)

Wed 19 Jan

£178 (£161)

Wed 26 Jan

£178 (£161)

Wed 2 Feb

£178 (£161)

Wed 9 Feb

£178 (£161)

Wed 16 Feb

£178 (£161)

Wed 23 Feb

£178 (£161)

Wed 2 Mar

£178 (£161)

Wed 9 Mar

£178 (£161)

Wed 16 Mar

£178 (£161)

Wed 23 Mar

£178 (£161)

Wed 30 Mar

£178 (£161)

Introduction to Mosaics (CE104 Summer)

Learn the art of creating beautiful mosaics in this practical course.

What will you learn on this course? This course will teach you the fundamental principles and introduce you to the world of mosaics, providing you with skills, knowledge and confidence to create your own mosaics at home. This is also an introductory course that will prepare you to continue learning other mosaic techniques as part of our new programme of mosaic courses.

We will teach you how to: - create a drawing or design in preparation for making a mosaic - Utilise tile cutters to cut and shape ceramic (or glass if applicable) tiles for mosaic - Understand and apply the direct method for mosaic making - Apply movement or flow to your mosaic, known as mosaic ‘andamento’ - Fix your mosaic tiles onto a wooden board using the correct adhesive - Complete your work with grout, clean and polish it to take home with you.

Think about a design idea and bring your printed images with you and/or any drawings to the first class. Alternatively design templates will be also available.

The mosaic projects you will work on will be within the following dimensions 21cmx29cm or 30cmx30cm dependent on the design.

Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. This is a practical mosaic course aimed at complete beginners but all levels are welcome. Learners will be introduced to this subject whilst Improvers and advanced students will be guided in their projects, The course is accessible for people with disabilities who have the relevant mosaic or ceramics experience and a support worker or carer may assist if required. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Bring any images and design ideas with you. Are there any additional costs? There are no additional costs. The course price includes all materials and equipment. Who teaches this course? Paula Ligo

Wed 4 May

£178 (£161)

Wed 11 May

£178 (£161)

Wed 18 May

£178 (£161)

Wed 25 May

£178 (£161)

Wed 8 Jun

£178 (£161)

Wed 15 Jun

£178 (£161)

Wed 22 Jun

£178 (£161)

Wed 29 Jun

£178 (£161)

Wed 6 Jul

£178 (£161)

Wed 13 Jul

£178 (£161)

Wed 20 Jul

£178 (£161)

Wed 27 Jul

£178 (£161)

Introduction to Oil Painting (VA93 Spring)

Learn how to paint successfully with oil paints. This course will cover themes such as portraiture, still life, a Master Copy painting and landscapes. What will you learn on this course? During this course you will be introduced to oil painting techniques covering themes such as portraiture, still life, and master copy painting and landscapes. You will also learn the following skills Preparing and priming your canvas How to transfer your drawings on to canvas The technique of fat over lean How to lay out an organised palette How to work with limited colours Laying down tonal ground Under painting Value studies Colour mixing The course will be taught through a combination of demonstrations and examples, practical tasks and work on individual projects. The tutor will provide guidance and assistance based on each individual’s needs and aims. On completion of this course you can expect to have a gained an understanding of how to approach oil painting. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to learners of all levels. Beginners who have no oil painting experience will be taught the basics. Students with previous oil painting experience can develop their skills further. The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can undertake practical drawing activities. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Basic oil painting materials will be provided but students are encouraged to bring their own materials as they develop their techniques and skill. MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? Any additional materials are provided at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Peter Tinkler

Wed 12 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£198 (£180)

Wed 19 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£198 (£180)

Wed 26 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£198 (£180)

Wed 2 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£198 (£180)

Wed 9 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£198 (£180)

Wed 16 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£198 (£180)

Wed 2 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£198 (£180)

Wed 9 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£198 (£180)

Wed 16 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£198 (£180)

Wed 23 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£198 (£180)

Wed 30 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£198 (£180)

Wed 6 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£198 (£180)

Introduction to Oil Painting (VA93 Summer)

Learn how to paint successfully with oil paints. This course will cover themes such as portraiture, still life, a Master Copy painting and landscapes. What will you learn on this course? During this course you will be introduced to oil painting techniques covering themes such as portraiture, still life, and master copy painting and landscapes. You will also learn the following skills Preparing and priming your canvas How to transfer your drawings on to canvas The technique of fat over lean How to lay out an organised palette How to work with limited colours Laying down tonal ground Under painting Value studies Colour mixing The course will be taught through a combination of demonstrations and examples, practical tasks and work on individual projects. The tutor will provide guidance and assistance based on each individual’s needs and aims. On completion of this course you can expect to have a gained an understanding of how to approach oil painting. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to learners of all levels. Beginners who have no oil painting experience will be taught the basics. Students with previous oil painting experience can develop their skills further. The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can undertake practical drawing activities. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Basic oil painting materials will be provided but students are encouraged to bring their own materials as they develop their techniques and skill. MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? Any additional materials are provided at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Peter Tinkler

Wed 27 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£188 (£170)

Wed 4 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£188 (£170)

Wed 11 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£188 (£170)

Wed 18 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£188 (£170)

Wed 25 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£188 (£170)

Wed 8 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£188 (£170)

Wed 15 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£188 (£170)

Wed 22 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£188 (£170)

Wed 29 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£188 (£170)

Wed 6 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£188 (£170)

Wed 13 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£188 (£170)

Wed 20 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£188 (£170)

Introduction to Photoshop (DM08 Spring)

Learn how to use Photoshop image manipulation software for a range media related tasks such as transforming photographs and creating graphic design elements.

What will you learn on this course?

On this course you will learn how to use Photoshop Elements image manipulation software for a range of media related tasks such as enhancing photographs and creating graphics for use in print or on the web.

The course is particularly useful for photographers who want to learn how to adjust things like brightness, contrast and colour levels. The course also covers more technical skills such as retouching and how to create more abstract graphic images. You might require graphics for marketing purposes, teaching resources or any number of personal projects such as flyers, posters and animated web graphics.

Topics covered on this course include:

Choosing the best tools to use How to use layers Adjusting brightness and contrast Adjusting colour balance Retouching photographs Removing unwanted objects from images Photomontage e.g. placing an object onto a different background Improving old photographs Creating abstract graphic images How to work with grids and guides How to work with text and images How to make an animated gif

In the first half of the course the tutor will work with the group to teach all the basics. In the second half you will receive more individual support as you work on your personal projects. You will be working in mac’s dedicated media studio, on Apple Mac computers.

On completing this course you can expect to have a working knowledge of Photoshop Elements and a selection of photos, images and graphics that you have produced using the software. You should also be confident to continue working with Photoshop independently.

There is a short break in the middle of each class.

Who is this course for?

This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers, you don’t need any previous experience as full instruction and guidance is given. We will be introducing Photoshop image manipulation software and talking through features in detail from the very basics. The course is ideal for those starting off and useful for learners looking to improve their skills and ensure they are using the programme as efficiently as possible.

The course is accessible for people with disabilities who are able to use a computer. A carer or support worker may assist learners on this course. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific needs.

You will spend most of this 2 hour class sitting at a computer.

Do you need to bring anything? If you wish to take your work home with you please bring a memory stick with at least 1GB of space.

You are welcome to work on your own Apple laptop with Photoshop Elements installed.

Are there any additional costs?

There are no additional costs. Who teaches this course? ILdiko Nagy

Thu 13 Jan
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Thu 20 Jan
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Thu 27 Jan
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Thu 3 Feb
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Thu 10 Feb
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Thu 17 Feb
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Thu 3 Mar
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Thu 10 Mar
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Thu 17 Mar
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Thu 24 Mar
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Thu 31 Mar
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Thu 7 Apr
Media Studio

£152 (£137)

Introduction to Portraiture Drawing (VA48 Spring)

Through a variety of short drawing challenges, you will be guided through techniques of improving your artist’s eye and developing your understanding and interpretation of form and tone to produce detailed portraits. A great introduction to drawing portraits. What will you learn on this course? This course will teach you how to draw with a focus on drawing portraits. Starting with a variety of short drawing challenges, you will be guided through techniques of improving your artist’s eye, developing your understanding and interpretation of form and tone to produce detailed portraits. The class will use a life model. MAC uses a selection of male and female models for our portraiture classes. The course will cover the following skills: Observational skills Improving the artist’s eye Techniques of proportion, lighting, tone, form and detail Selection of appropriate materials to achieve desired effect Time management skills and methodical planning Fine motor skills Confidence Building

The course will be taught through a combination of group challenges and individual work on portrait drawings. The tutor will set challenges and provide assistance based on each individual’s needs and aims. The course will focus on drawing using different grades of pencils and graphite sticks however advanced students are welcome to bring materials to work in other mediums such as watercolour or pastels. On completion of this course you can expect to have a selection of drawings and portraits. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open beginners so you don’t need any previous drawing experience. A great course for those interested in learning to draw or attempting portraiture for the first time. The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can undertake practical drawing activities. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day, such as pencils, graphite sticks, erasers, sharpeners. You may wish to bring additional art materials to work with. MAC can provide basic equipment and materials to participants attending most courses if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? You may wish to provide additional materials at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Nita Newman

Sat 15 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Sat 22 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Sat 29 Jan
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Sat 5 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Sat 12 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Sat 19 Feb
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Sat 5 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Sat 12 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Sat 19 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Sat 26 Mar
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Sat 2 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Sat 9 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Introduction to Portraiture Drawing (VA48 Summer)

Through a variety of short drawing challenges, you will be guided through techniques of improving your artist’s eye and developing your understanding and interpretation of form and tone to produce detailed portraits. A great introduction to drawing portraits. What will you learn on this course? This course will teach you how to draw with a focus on drawing portraits. Starting with a variety of short drawing challenges, you will be guided through techniques of improving your artist’s eye, developing your understanding and interpretation of form and tone to produce detailed portraits. The class will use a life model. MAC uses a selection of male and female models for our portraiture classes. The course will cover the following skills: Observational skills Improving the artist’s eye Techniques of proportion, lighting, tone, form and detail Selection of appropriate materials to achieve desired effect Time management skills and methodical planning Fine motor skills Confidence Building

The course will be taught through a combination of group challenges and individual work on portrait drawings. The tutor will set challenges and provide assistance based on each individual’s needs and aims. The course will focus on drawing using different grades of pencils and graphite sticks however advanced students are welcome to bring materials to work in other mediums such as watercolour or pastels. On completion of this course you can expect to have a selection of drawings and portraits. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open beginners so you don’t need any previous drawing experience. A great course for those interested in learning to draw or attempting portraiture for the first time. The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can undertake practical drawing activities. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? The drawing and painting studio is equipped with easels and drawing boards. Paper is provided that can be used during the lesson, and some basic art materials that may be borrowed on the day, such as pencils, graphite sticks, erasers, sharpeners. You may wish to bring additional art materials to work with. MAC can provide basic equipment and materials to participants attending most courses if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? You may wish to provide additional materials at your own expense. Who teaches this course? Nita Newman

Sat 30 Apr
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Sat 7 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Sat 14 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Sat 21 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Sat 28 May
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Sat 11 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Sat 18 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Sat 25 Jun
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Sat 2 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Sat 9 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Sat 16 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Sat 23 Jul
Drawing and Painting Studio

£138 (£125)

Introduction to Printmaking (VA106 Spring)

This course will give you a solid introduction to the discipline of printmaking. You will learn a variety of techniques and learn how to work with a printing press. What will you learn on the course? On this course you will have the opportunity to try and experiment with a range of relief printing methods and techniques with the use of a press. You will have access to specialist print equipment and materials and be encouraged to develop your own varied print practice. Upon completion of the course you will be signposted to similar resources in the area should you choose to pursue print as a discipline. We will discover the process of carving or building your own print blocks from a selection of materials with demonstrations in the following methods: Intaglio Collograph blocks Lino cuts Woodcuts Multi layer prints Ink selection, swatching and paper/surface experimentation You will be using a range of specialist equipment including lino and woodcut tools, craft knives, acrylic sheets, print rollers and working with oil and water based inks. The course aims to give you a solid introduction to the discipline of print. Participants will learn transferrable skills and the value of preparation, planning and selection of materials as well as a range of printing techniques in the form of demos group and individual experimentation with tutor guidance. You will be supported and encouraged to develop your own project within the course and have a practice to build on after the course ends. The course includes a short break. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. This course designed for all levels and experience and for those who may have some experience of printmaking but have not worked with a printing press. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities who can participate in practical art and craft activities. The room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Participants will need to have good manual dexterity but it is not a must. Please be aware there is a high risk of cuts and small injuries from the use of cutting tools but the tutor will teach safe use techniques to minimise risk. Do you need to bring anything? You must bring a sketchbook and a waterproof apron. If you have particularly sensitive skin you may wish to use a barrier cream or bring thin latex gloves. MAC will provide equipment and materials for participants, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own tools where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? Only the cost of an apron (£5 approx.) and a sketchbook (£5 approx.) Who teaches this course? Niall Singh

Mon 10 Jan
Weston Studio

£163 (£147)

Mon 17 Jan
Weston Studio

£163 (£147)

Mon 24 Jan
Weston Studio

£163 (£147)

Mon 31 Jan
Weston Studio

£163 (£147)

Mon 7 Feb
Weston Studio

£163 (£147)

Mon 14 Feb
Weston Studio

£163 (£147)

Mon 28 Feb
Weston Studio

£163 (£147)

Mon 7 Mar
Weston Studio

£163 (£147)

Mon 14 Mar
Weston Studio

£163 (£147)

Mon 21 Mar
Weston Studio

£163 (£147)

Mon 28 Mar
Weston Studio

£163 (£147)

Mon 4 Apr
Weston Studio

£163 (£147)

Introduction to Printmaking (VA106 Summer)

This course will give you a solid introduction to the discipline of printmaking. You will learn a variety of techniques and learn how to work with a printing press. What will you learn on the course? On this course you will have the opportunity to try and experiment with a range of relief printing methods and techniques with the use of a press. You will have access to specialist print equipment and materials and be encouraged to develop your own varied print practice. Upon completion of the course you will be signposted to similar resources in the area should you choose to pursue print as a discipline. We will discover the process of carving or building your own print blocks from a selection of materials with demonstrations in the following methods: Intaglio Collograph blocks Lino cuts Woodcuts Multi layer prints Ink selection, swatching and paper/surface experimentation You will be using a range of specialist equipment including lino and woodcut tools, craft knives, acrylic sheets, print rollers and working with oil and water based inks. The course aims to give you a solid introduction to the discipline of print. Participants will learn transferrable skills and the value of preparation, planning and selection of materials as well as a range of printing techniques in the form of demos group and individual experimentation with tutor guidance. You will be supported and encouraged to develop your own project within the course and have a practice to build on after the course ends. The course includes a short break. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. This course designed for all levels and experience and for those who may have some experience of printmaking but have not worked with a printing press. The course may be accessible for people with disabilities who can participate in practical art and craft activities. The room is wheelchair accessible and a support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Participants will need to have good manual dexterity but it is not a must. Please be aware there is a high risk of cuts and small injuries from the use of cutting tools but the tutor will teach safe use techniques to minimise risk. Do you need to bring anything? You must bring a sketchbook and a waterproof apron. If you have particularly sensitive skin you may wish to use a barrier cream or bring thin latex gloves. MAC will provide equipment and materials for participants, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own tools where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? Only the cost of an apron (£5 approx.) and a sketchbook (£5 approx.) Who teaches this course? Niall Singh

Mon 25 Apr
Weston Studio

£163 (£147)

Mon 2 May
Weston Studio

£163 (£147)

Mon 9 May
Weston Studio

£163 (£147)

Mon 16 May
Weston Studio

£163 (£147)

Mon 23 May
Weston Studio

£163 (£147)

Mon 6 Jun
Weston Studio

£163 (£147)

Mon 13 Jun
Weston Studio

£163 (£147)

Mon 20 Jun
Weston Studio

£163 (£147)

Mon 27 Jun
Weston Studio

£163 (£147)

Mon 4 Jul
Weston Studio

£163 (£147)

Mon 11 Jul
Weston Studio

£163 (£147)

Mon 18 Jul
Weston Studio

£163 (£147)

Introduction to Sewing and Dressmaking (TE103 Spring)

Introduction to Sewing and Dressmaking An introduction to the techniques of sewing. Learn how to use a sewing machine and use it for dressmaking and sewing techniques, before putting them to practice by making a simple top, dress or jumpsuit. What will you learn on this course? This course will introduce students to the simple techniques of sewing including basic seams, darts and manipulating techniques such as pleats and gathers. The tutor will give step by step demonstrations and you will be encouraged to sew that individual step alone with additional support as required. Having completed a series of samples you will be able to apply these new skills to make a simple top, dress or jumpsuit from base patterns provided in standard graded sizes. Students will trace out the pattern and learn how to adjust it to their own size, creating a pattern for future use at home. The course covers the following: How to sew and use a domestic machine How to sew seams, darts, pleats, finishing techniques, pockets, collars, binding and fastenings Understanding the fittings techniques used in clothes and how to toile a garment, make adjustments and adapt a pattern to fit Creating different fabric manipulation techniques used in clothing How to read a sewing pattern and make adjustments Using sewing equipment safely Precision and accuracy when sewing How to make a garment to fit themselves (with a pattern to replicate the garment at home) On completion of this course you can expect to have produced a selection of small samples that will be presented in a folder with explanations for students to take home for future sewing projects. You will also have made a finished sewn product (top, dress or jumpsuit) that you can wear and a complete pattern to your size to use again. You should feel more confident about sewing clothing in the future. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. Beginners may be completely new to sewing or may not have done it for some time and will be taught all the basics. Improvers may have previous experience of sewing but want to develop their skills further by making something that they can wear and trying more advanced techniques, lessons will be adapted suitably to the group. The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can undertake practical sewing activities including operating a sewing machine and using an iron. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? A selection of essential sewing equipment will be provided. You must bring a folder/plastic to store your samples and a 2.5m length of coloured cotton /linen based fabric to make your garment. (fabric is not needed during initial sessions so students can discuss with tutor’s suitability for their ideas/where to buy fabric/what kind of fabric) We encourage you to bring your own sewing kit consisting of hand sewing needles, thread (black and white), tape measure, stitch ripper, pins, scissors (large and small), pens, pencils, ruler, tailors chalk. If you own a sewing machine and prefer to use it, you can have it PAT tested for a cost of £5 and bring it in to use during class. Please pay at Sales and Information prior to your course and testing will take place at the start of the first class. MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? Items listed above that you do not already have must be provided at your own expense. An indication of the cost of these items is given below. These items can be purchased from fabric and haberdashery stores, Birmingham Rag market, EU fabrics, Barry’s fabric, fancy silk store and large supermarkets. Please contact us for more information. Folder: £1.00-£3.00 Cotton fabric: £1.00-£3.00 per metre (2.5 metres required) SEWING KIT Hand sewing needles: £1.00 Thread: 60p-£1.00 Tape measure: £1.00-£1.50 Stitch ripper: £1.00-£1.50 Pins: £1.00 Scissors (large and small): £1.00-£3.00 Pens/ pencils/ ruler: £1.00 Tailors chalk: £1.00-£3.00 Who teaches this course? Charlotte Stacey

Tue 11 Jan

£176 (£160)

Tue 18 Jan

£176 (£160)

Tue 25 Jan

£176 (£160)

Tue 1 Feb

£176 (£160)

Tue 8 Feb

£176 (£160)

Tue 15 Feb

£176 (£160)

Tue 1 Mar

£176 (£160)

Tue 8 Mar

£176 (£160)

Tue 15 Mar

£176 (£160)

Tue 22 Mar

£176 (£160)

Tue 29 Mar

£176 (£160)

Tue 5 Apr

£176 (£160)

Introduction to Sewing and Dressmaking (TE103 Summer)

Introduction to Sewing and Dressmaking An introduction to the techniques of sewing. Learn how to use a sewing machine and use it for dressmaking and sewing techniques, before putting them to practice by making a simple top, dress or jumpsuit. What will you learn on this course? This course will introduce students to the simple techniques of sewing including basic seams, darts and manipulating techniques such as pleats and gathers. The tutor will give step by step demonstrations and you will be encouraged to sew that individual step alone with additional support as required. Having completed a series of samples you will be able to apply these new skills to make a simple top, dress or jumpsuit from base patterns provided in standard graded sizes. Students will trace out the pattern and learn how to adjust it to their own size, creating a pattern for future use at home. The course covers the following: How to sew and use a domestic machine How to sew seams, darts, pleats, finishing techniques, pockets, collars, binding and fastenings Understanding the fittings techniques used in clothes and how to toile a garment, make adjustments and adapt a pattern to fit Creating different fabric manipulation techniques used in clothing How to read a sewing pattern and make adjustments Using sewing equipment safely Precision and accuracy when sewing How to make a garment to fit themselves (with a pattern to replicate the garment at home) On completion of this course you can expect to have produced a selection of small samples that will be presented in a folder with explanations for students to take home for future sewing projects. You will also have made a finished sewn product (top, dress or jumpsuit) that you can wear and a complete pattern to your size to use again. You should feel more confident about sewing clothing in the future. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+ years. It is open to beginners and improvers. Beginners may be completely new to sewing or may not have done it for some time and will be taught all the basics. Improvers may have previous experience of sewing but want to develop their skills further by making something that they can wear and trying more advanced techniques, lessons will be adapted suitably to the group. The course is accessible for people with disabilities who can undertake practical sewing activities including operating a sewing machine and using an iron. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Please contact us to discuss your specific situation and needs. Do you need to bring anything? A selection of essential sewing equipment will be provided. You must bring a folder/plastic to store your samples and a 2.5m length of coloured cotton /linen based fabric to make your garment. (fabric is not needed during initial sessions so students can discuss with tutor’s suitability for their ideas/where to buy fabric/what kind of fabric) We encourage you to bring your own sewing kit consisting of hand sewing needles, thread (black and white), tape measure, stitch ripper, pins, scissors (large and small), pens, pencils, ruler, tailors chalk. If you own a sewing machine and prefer to use it, you can have it PAT tested for a cost of £5 and bring it in to use during class. Please pay at Sales and Information prior to your course and testing will take place at the start of the first class. MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? Items listed above that you do not already have must be provided at your own expense. An indication of the cost of these items is given below. These items can be purchased from fabric and haberdashery stores, Birmingham Rag market, EU fabrics, Barry’s fabric, fancy silk store and large supermarkets. Please contact us for more information. Folder: £1.00-£3.00 Cotton fabric: £1.00-£3.00 per metre (2.5 metres required) SEWING KIT Hand sewing needles: £1.00 Thread: 60p-£1.00 Tape measure: £1.00-£1.50 Stitch ripper: £1.00-£1.50 Pins: £1.00 Scissors (large and small): £1.00-£3.00 Pens/ pencils/ ruler: £1.00 Tailors chalk: £1.00-£3.00 Who teaches this course? Charlotte Stacey

Tue 26 Apr
Textiles Studio

£166 (£150)

Tue 3 May
Textiles Studio

£166 (£150)

Tue 10 May
Textiles Studio

£166 (£150)

Tue 17 May
Textiles Studio

£166 (£150)

Tue 24 May
Textiles Studio

£166 (£150)

Tue 7 Jun
Textiles Studio

£166 (£150)

Tue 14 Jun
Textiles Studio

£166 (£150)

Tue 21 Jun
Textiles Studio

£166 (£150)

Tue 28 Jun
Textiles Studio

£166 (£150)

Tue 5 Jul
Textiles Studio

£166 (£150)

Tue 12 Jul
Textiles Studio

£166 (£150)

Tue 19 Jul
Textiles Studio

£166 (£150)

Introduction to Wheelwork for Beginners (CE105 Spring)

You will learn a series of basic techniques in the art of wheel throwing including clay preparation to creating cylinders and bowls and then progressing to other forms followed by glazing and firing your work. What will you learn on this course? On this course the tutor will demonstrate the key stages of wheel throwing enabling you to create pieces with great satisfaction. You will begin by focusing on two main forms; the cylinder and the bowl. Most other forms can be learnt from those two forms. You will also learn the technique of turning. The tutor will encourage you to develop your skills and through repetition build your confidence, encouraging you to be selective about work that is retained for firing, so that you deepen your understanding of the art of wheelwork. The tutor will encourage you to produce functional and non-functional items after completing a piece you will be introduced to the art of surface decoration with the use of various glaze colours which will then go on to be fired in the kiln. Throughout the weeks you will gain both wheel throwing and general ceramic knowledge.
Who is this course for? The course is aimed at beginners aged 18+ years. You don’t need any previous experience of wheel throwing as full guidance will be given through all the stages. The course is accessible for people with disabilities but requires good manual dexterity and some physical strength and fitness. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Do you need to bring anything? Short sleeves, old trousers and an apron are recommended but clay washes off easily. MAC can provide basic equipment and materials to participants attending most courses if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be a charge for any oversized work fired. Who teaches this course? Serge Sanghera

Tue 11 Jan

£225 (£204)

Tue 18 Jan

£225 (£204)

Tue 25 Jan

£225 (£204)

Tue 1 Feb

£225 (£204)

Tue 8 Feb

£225 (£204)

Tue 15 Feb

£225 (£204)

Tue 1 Mar

£225 (£204)

Tue 8 Mar

£225 (£204)

Tue 15 Mar

£225 (£204)

Tue 22 Mar

£225 (£204)

Tue 29 Mar

£225 (£204)

Tue 5 Apr

£225 (£204)

Introduction to Wheelwork for Beginners (CE105 Summer)

You will learn a series of basic techniques in the art of wheel throwing including clay preparation to creating cylinders and bowls and then progressing to other forms followed by glazing and firing your work. What will you learn on this course? On this course the tutor will demonstrate the key stages of wheel throwing enabling you to create pieces with great satisfaction. You will begin by focusing on two main forms; the cylinder and the bowl. Most other forms can be learnt from those two forms. You will also learn the technique of turning. The tutor will encourage you to develop your skills and through repetition build your confidence, encouraging you to be selective about work that is retained for firing, so that you deepen your understanding of the art of wheelwork. The tutor will encourage you to produce functional and non-functional items after completing a piece you will be introduced to the art of surface decoration with the use of various glaze colours which will then go on to be fired in the kiln. Throughout the weeks you will gain both wheel throwing and general ceramic knowledge.
Who is this course for? The course is aimed at beginners aged 18+ years. You don’t need any previous experience of wheel throwing as full guidance will be given through all the stages. The course is accessible for people with disabilities but requires good manual dexterity and some physical strength and fitness. A support worker or a carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The room is wheelchair accessible. Do you need to bring anything? Short sleeves, old trousers and an apron are recommended but clay washes off easily. MAC can provide basic equipment and materials to participants attending most courses if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Please note that there will be a charge for any oversized work fired. Who teaches this course? Serge Sanghera

Tue 26 Apr

£225 (£204)

Tue 3 May

£225 (£204)

Tue 10 May

£225 (£204)

Tue 17 May

£225 (£204)

Tue 24 May

£225 (£204)

Tue 7 Jun

£225 (£204)

Tue 14 Jun

£225 (£204)

Tue 21 Jun

£225 (£204)

Tue 28 Jun

£225 (£204)

Tue 5 Jul

£225 (£204)

Tue 12 Jul

£225 (£204)

Tue 19 Jul

£225 (£204)

Introduction to Wheelwork for Young People (YP98 Spring)

Love the idea of throwing pots then this is the course for you. What will you learn on this course? This one-day course provides an exciting introduction to the world of ceramics and the art of wheel work. You will be shown how to make thrown ceramic bowls which you can decorate using coloured slips. The course is delivered through a mix of tutor demonstrations and activities designed to allow you to explore clay and specifically how to work with a potter’s wheel. The tutor will explain how to decorate your pot and how to paint with coloured slips to personalise your bowls. You will be encouraged to review and refine your work to produce finished ceramic pieces that are unique. Participants will have a great sense of achievement and will feel proud of what they have accomplished, hopefully making some new friends along the way. Your finished glazed ceramic creation will be ready to collect from MAC two to four weeks after the workshop to allow time for firing to take place. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for young people aged 12 - 17 years. It is open to students of all levels. Those with little or no experience of pottery will be shown demonstrations and those with previous experience will be able to self-direct their work with guidance from the tutor. The course is accessible for people of all abilities however you do need dexterity in your hands to work with clay. The room is wheelchair accessible, carers and guardians must book a complimentary ticket. Please do contact us to discuss your particular needs. Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to. Do you need to bring anything? All materials and equipment is provided. You may wish to bring your own apron, but we will provide one for you on the day. Are there any additional costs? The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Who teaches this course? Serge Sanghera

Sun 16 Jan
Sun 23 Jan
Sun 30 Jan
Sun 6 Feb
Sun 13 Feb
Sun 20 Feb
Sun 27 Feb
Sun 6 Mar
Sun 13 Mar
Sun 20 Mar
Sun 27 Mar
Sun 3 Apr
Sun 10 Apr

Introduction to Wheelwork for Young People (YP98 Summer)

Love the idea of throwing pots then this is the course for you. What will you learn on this course? This one-day course provides an exciting introduction to the world of ceramics and the art of wheel work. You will be shown how to make thrown ceramic bowls which you can decorate using coloured slips. The course is delivered through a mix of tutor demonstrations and activities designed to allow you to explore clay and specifically how to work with a potter’s wheel. The tutor will explain how to decorate your pot and how to paint with coloured slips to personalise your bowls. You will be encouraged to review and refine your work to produce finished ceramic pieces that are unique. Participants will have a great sense of achievement and will feel proud of what they have accomplished, hopefully making some new friends along the way. Your finished glazed ceramic creation will be ready to collect from MAC two to four weeks after the workshop to allow time for firing to take place. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for young people aged 12 - 17 years. It is open to students of all levels. Those with little or no experience of pottery will be shown demonstrations and those with previous experience will be able to self-direct their work with guidance from the tutor. The course is accessible for people of all abilities however you do need dexterity in your hands to work with clay. The room is wheelchair accessible, carers and guardians must book a complimentary ticket. Please do contact us to discuss your particular needs. Age ranges are set carefully to take into account key age developments, materials being used and course stimulus. It is very important that age ranges are not too large or across key stages and therefore need to be adhered to. Do you need to bring anything? All materials and equipment is provided. You may wish to bring your own apron, but we will provide one for you on the day. Are there any additional costs? The course price includes all materials and firing of your work. Who teaches this course? Serge Sanghera

Sat 30 Apr
Sat 7 May
Sat 14 May
Sat 21 May
Sat 28 May
Sat 11 Jun
Sat 18 Jun
Sat 25 Jun
Sat 2 Jul
Sat 9 Jul
Sat 16 Jul
Sat 23 Jul

It's a Wonderful Life

It's a Wonderful Life
  • 1946
  • US
  • 2h 9min
  • U
  • Directed by: Frank Capra
  • Cast: James Stewart, Donna Reed, Lionel Barrymore, Henry Travers

Small-town boy Stewart runs into financial difficulties and is on the brink of suicide when an elderly angel descends to earth to show him all the good his life has done for those around him. Archetypal Capra sentimentality with a superbly detailed fantasy framework and one of Stewart's most lovable performances. One to warm even the most glacial heart.

Sun 19 Dec
Cinema

£8–£10.25 (Children £5–£8)

Wed 22 Dec
Cinema

£8–£10.25 (Children £5–£8)

Thu 23 Dec
Cinema

£8–£10.25 (Children £5–£8)

Iyengar Yoga for Beginners (WB103 Spring)

A yoga practice based on classical Hatha Yoga, as developed by BKS Iyengar, with emphasis on precision and alignment in postures. The course is hard working physical yoga practice and usually includes a short period of relaxation at the end of the class.

What will you learn on this course?

Iyengar Yoga is a yoga practice based on classical Hatha Yoga, as developed by BKS Iyengar, with emphasis on precision and alignment in postures. Basic standing, seated and back bending postures (asanas) will be taught, as well as some recuperative poses. Inverted postures are introduced as and when the student is ready. Props (foam blocks, bricks and belts) are provided and used to make postures more accessible to students.

The course is hard working physical yoga practice and usually includes a short period of relaxation at the end of the class. Generally, students progress at their own rate with support from the tutor. With regular practice the benefits of Iyengar Yoga to body and mind are many, including increased suppleness, strength and stamina as well as improved concentration and general well-being. Who is this course for?

This course is for adults aged 18+. It is suitable for beginners with no previous experience and those who have some experience and wish to revisit their practice before moving on to the Improvers level.

If you suffer from a medical condition, we recommend that you take advice from your doctor before doing this type of physical exercise. All students should inform the tutor of any ongoing health problems. Do you need to bring anything? You must bring your own non-slip yoga mat and a cotton yoga blanket. Please wear comfortable clothing that allows free movement. Other props such as yoga blocks and belts are provided. Are there any additional costs? A non-stick yoga mat (approx. £17) and a cotton yoga blanket (approx. £20) must be provided at your own expense. You may wish to purchase additional props to aid your practice at home. Please contact us for more info. Who teaches this course? Elisabeth Moreton

Fri 14 Jan
Randle Studio

£93 (£84)

Fri 21 Jan
Randle Studio

£93 (£84)

Fri 28 Jan
Randle Studio

£93 (£84)

Fri 4 Feb
Randle Studio

£93 (£84)

Fri 11 Feb
Randle Studio

£93 (£84)

Fri 18 Feb
Randle Studio

£93 (£84)

Fri 4 Mar
Randle Studio

£93 (£84)

Fri 11 Mar
Randle Studio

£93 (£84)

Fri 18 Mar
Randle Studio

£93 (£84)

Fri 25 Mar
Randle Studio

£93 (£84)

Fri 1 Apr
Randle Studio

£93 (£84)

Fri 8 Apr
Randle Studio

£93 (£84)

Iyengar Yoga for Beginners (WB103 Summer)

A yoga practice based on classical Hatha Yoga, as developed by BKS Iyengar, with emphasis on precision and alignment in postures. The course is hard working physical yoga practice and usually includes a short period of relaxation at the end of the class.

What will you learn on this course?

Iyengar Yoga is a yoga practice based on classical Hatha Yoga, as developed by BKS Iyengar, with emphasis on precision and alignment in postures. Basic standing, seated and back bending postures (asanas) will be taught, as well as some recuperative poses. Inverted postures are introduced as and when the student is ready. Props (foam blocks, bricks and belts) are provided and used to make postures more accessible to students.

The course is hard working physical yoga practice and usually includes a short period of relaxation at the end of the class. Generally, students progress at their own rate with support from the tutor. With regular practice the benefits of Iyengar Yoga to body and mind are many, including increased suppleness, strength and stamina as well as improved concentration and general well-being. Who is this course for?

This course is for adults aged 18+. It is suitable for beginners with no previous experience and those who have some experience and wish to revisit their practice before moving on to the Improvers level.

If you suffer from a medical condition, we recommend that you take advice from your doctor before doing this type of physical exercise. All students should inform the tutor of any ongoing health problems. Do you need to bring anything? You must bring your own non-slip yoga mat and a cotton yoga blanket. Please wear comfortable clothing that allows free movement. Other props such as yoga blocks and belts are provided. Are there any additional costs? A non-stick yoga mat (approx. £17) and a cotton yoga blanket (approx. £20) must be provided at your own expense. You may wish to purchase additional props to aid your practice at home. Please contact us for more info. Who teaches this course? Elisabeth Moreton

Fri 29 Apr
Randle Studio

£93 (£84)

Fri 6 May
Randle Studio

£93 (£84)

Fri 13 May
Randle Studio

£93 (£84)

Fri 20 May
Randle Studio

£93 (£84)

Fri 27 May
Randle Studio

£93 (£84)

Fri 10 Jun
Randle Studio

£93 (£84)

Fri 17 Jun
Randle Studio

£93 (£84)

Fri 24 Jun
Randle Studio

£93 (£84)

Fri 1 Jul
Randle Studio

£93 (£84)

Fri 8 Jul
Randle Studio

£93 (£84)

Fri 15 Jul
Randle Studio

£93 (£84)

Fri 22 Jul
Randle Studio

£93 (£84)

Iyengar Yoga for Improvers (WB17 Spring)

A yoga practice based on classical Hatha Yoga, as developed by BKS Iyengar, with emphasis on precision and alignment in postures. The course is hard working physical yoga practice and usually includes a short period of relaxation at the end of the class.

What will you learn on this course?

Iyengar Yoga is a yoga practice based on classical Hatha Yoga, as developed by BKS Iyengar, with emphasis on precision and alignment in postures. Basic standing, seated and back bending postures (asanas) will be taught, as well as some recuperative poses. Inverted postures are introduced as and when the student is ready. Props (foam blocks, bricks and belts) are provided and used to make postures more accessible to students.

The course is hard working physical yoga practice and usually includes a short period of relaxation at the end of the class. Generally, students progress at their own rate with support from the tutor. With regular practice the benefits of Iyengar Yoga to body and mind are many, including increased suppleness, strength and stamina as well as improved concentration and general well-being. Who is this course for?

This course is for adults aged 18+. It is suitable for improvers with previous experience and those wishing to deepen their practice.

If you suffer from a medical condition, we recommend that you take advice from your doctor before doing this type of physical exercise. All students should inform the tutor of any ongoing health problems. Do you need to bring anything? You must bring your own non-stick yoga mat and a cotton yoga blanket. Please wear comfortable clothing that allows free movement. Other props such as yoga blocks and belts are provided. Are there any additional costs? A non-slip yoga mat (approx. £17) and a cotton yoga blanket (approx. £20) must be provided at your own expense. You may wish to purchase additional props to aid your practice at home. Please contact us for more info. Who teaches this course? Elisabeth Moreton

Fri 14 Jan
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Fri 21 Jan
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Fri 28 Jan
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Fri 4 Feb
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Fri 11 Feb
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Fri 18 Feb
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Fri 4 Mar
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Fri 11 Mar
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Fri 18 Mar
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Fri 25 Mar
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Fri 1 Apr
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Fri 8 Apr
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Iyengar Yoga for Improvers (WB17 Summer)

A yoga practice based on classical Hatha Yoga, as developed by BKS Iyengar, with emphasis on precision and alignment in postures. The course is hard working physical yoga practice and usually includes a short period of relaxation at the end of the class.

What will you learn on this course?

Iyengar Yoga is a yoga practice based on classical Hatha Yoga, as developed by BKS Iyengar, with emphasis on precision and alignment in postures. Basic standing, seated and back bending postures (asanas) will be taught, as well as some recuperative poses. Inverted postures are introduced as and when the student is ready. Props (foam blocks, bricks and belts) are provided and used to make postures more accessible to students.

The course is hard working physical yoga practice and usually includes a short period of relaxation at the end of the class. Generally, students progress at their own rate with support from the tutor. With regular practice the benefits of Iyengar Yoga to body and mind are many, including increased suppleness, strength and stamina as well as improved concentration and general well-being. Who is this course for?

This course is for adults aged 18+. It is suitable for improvers with previous experience and those wishing to deepen their practice.

If you suffer from a medical condition, we recommend that you take advice from your doctor before doing this type of physical exercise. All students should inform the tutor of any ongoing health problems. Do you need to bring anything? You must bring your own non-stick yoga mat and a cotton yoga blanket. Please wear comfortable clothing that allows free movement. Other props such as yoga blocks and belts are provided. Are there any additional costs? A non-slip yoga mat (approx. £17) and a cotton yoga blanket (approx. £20) must be provided at your own expense. You may wish to purchase additional props to aid your practice at home. Please contact us for more info. Who teaches this course? Elisabeth Moreton

Fri 29 Apr
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Fri 6 May
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Fri 13 May
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Fri 20 May
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Fri 27 May
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Fri 10 Jun
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Fri 17 Jun
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Fri 24 Jun
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Fri 1 Jul
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Fri 8 Jul
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Fri 15 Jul
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Fri 22 Jul
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Iyengar Yoga (WB106 Spring)

A yoga practice based on classical Hatha Yoga, as developed by BKS Iyengar, with emphasis on precision and alignment in postures. The course is hard working physical yoga practice and usually includes a short period of relaxation at the end of the class.

What will you learn on this course?

Iyengar Yoga is a yoga practice based on classical Hatha Yoga, as developed by BKS Iyengar, with emphasis on precision and alignment in postures. Basic standing, seated and back bending postures (asanas) will be taught, as well as some recuperative poses. Inverted postures are introduced as and when the student is ready. Props (foam blocks, bricks and belts) are provided and used to make postures more accessible to students.

The course is hard working physical yoga practice and usually includes a short period of relaxation at the end of the class. Generally, students progress at their own rate with support from the tutor. With regular practice the benefits of Iyengar Yoga to body and mind are many, including increased suppleness, strength and stamina as well as improved concentration and general well-being. Who is this course for?

This course is for adults aged 18+. It is suitable for beginners with no previous experience and those wishing to deepen their practice.

If you suffer from a medical condition we recommend that you take advice from your doctor before doing this type of physical exercise. All students should inform the tutor of any ongoing health problems. Do you need to bring anything? You must bring your own non-stick yoga mat and a cotton yoga blanket. Please wear comfortable clothing that allows free movement. Other props such as yoga blocks and belts are provided. Are there any additional costs? A non-stick yoga mat (approx. £17) and a cotton yoga blanket (approx. £20) must be provided at your own expense. You may wish to purchase additional props to aid your practice at home. Please contact us for more info. Who teaches this course? Hannah Cliff

Thu 13 Jan
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 20 Jan
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 27 Jan
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 3 Feb
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 10 Feb
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 17 Feb
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 3 Mar
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 10 Mar
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 17 Mar
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 24 Mar
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 31 Mar
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 7 Apr
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Iyengar Yoga (WB106 Summer)

A yoga practice based on classical Hatha Yoga, as developed by BKS Iyengar, with emphasis on precision and alignment in postures. The course is hard working physical yoga practice and usually includes a short period of relaxation at the end of the class.

What will you learn on this course?

Iyengar Yoga is a yoga practice based on classical Hatha Yoga, as developed by BKS Iyengar, with emphasis on precision and alignment in postures. Basic standing, seated and back bending postures (asanas) will be taught, as well as some recuperative poses. Inverted postures are introduced as and when the student is ready. Props (foam blocks, bricks and belts) are provided and used to make postures more accessible to students.

The course is hard working physical yoga practice and usually includes a short period of relaxation at the end of the class. Generally, students progress at their own rate with support from the tutor. With regular practice the benefits of Iyengar Yoga to body and mind are many, including increased suppleness, strength and stamina as well as improved concentration and general well-being. Who is this course for?

This course is for adults aged 18+. It is suitable for beginners with no previous experience and those wishing to deepen their practice.

If you suffer from a medical condition we recommend that you take advice from your doctor before doing this type of physical exercise. All students should inform the tutor of any ongoing health problems. Do you need to bring anything? You must bring your own non-stick yoga mat and a cotton yoga blanket. Please wear comfortable clothing that allows free movement. Other props such as yoga blocks and belts are provided. Are there any additional costs? A non-stick yoga mat (approx. £17) and a cotton yoga blanket (approx. £20) must be provided at your own expense. You may wish to purchase additional props to aid your practice at home. Please contact us for more info. Who teaches this course? Hannah Cliff

Thu 28 Apr
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 5 May
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 12 May
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 19 May
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 26 May
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 9 Jun
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 16 Jun
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 23 Jun
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 30 Jun
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 7 Jul
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 14 Jul
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Thu 21 Jul
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Iyengar Yoga (WB93 Spring)

A yoga practice based on classical Hatha Yoga, as developed by BKS Iyengar, with emphasis on precision and alignment in postures. The course is hard working physical yoga practice and usually includes a short period of relaxation at the end of the class.

What will you learn on this course?

Iyengar Yoga is a yoga practice based on classical Hatha Yoga, as developed by BKS Iyengar, with emphasis on precision and alignment in postures. Basic standing, seated and back bending postures (asanas) will be taught, as well as some recuperative poses. Inverted postures are introduced as and when the student is ready. Props (foam blocks, bricks and belts) are provided and used to make postures more accessible to students.

The course is hard working physical yoga practice and usually includes a short period of relaxation at the end of the class. Generally, students progress at their own rate with support from the tutor. With regular practice the benefits of Iyengar Yoga to body and mind are many, including increased suppleness, strength and stamina as well as improved concentration and general well-being. Who is this course for?

This course is for adults aged 18+. It is suitable for beginners with no previous experience and those wishing to deepen their practice.

If you suffer from a medical condition we recommend that you take advice from your doctor before doing this type of physical exercise. All students should inform the tutor of any ongoing health problems. Do you need to bring anything? You must bring your own non-stick yoga mat and a cotton yoga blanket. Please wear comfortable clothing that allows free movement. Other props such as yoga blocks and belts are provided. Are there any additional costs? A non-stick yoga mat (approx. £17) and a cotton yoga blanket (approx. £20) must be provided at your own expense. You may wish to purchase additional props to aid your practice at home. Please contact us for more info. Who teaches this course? Hannah Cliff

Mon 10 Jan
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Mon 17 Jan
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Mon 24 Jan
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Mon 31 Jan
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Mon 7 Feb
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Mon 14 Feb
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Mon 28 Feb
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Mon 7 Mar
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Mon 14 Mar
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Mon 21 Mar
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Mon 28 Mar
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Mon 4 Apr
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Iyengar Yoga (WB93 Summer)

A yoga practice based on classical Hatha Yoga, as developed by BKS Iyengar, with emphasis on precision and alignment in postures. The course is hard working physical yoga practice and usually includes a short period of relaxation at the end of the class.

What will you learn on this course?

Iyengar Yoga is a yoga practice based on classical Hatha Yoga, as developed by BKS Iyengar, with emphasis on precision and alignment in postures. Basic standing, seated and back bending postures (asanas) will be taught, as well as some recuperative poses. Inverted postures are introduced as and when the student is ready. Props (foam blocks, bricks and belts) are provided and used to make postures more accessible to students.

The course is hard working physical yoga practice and usually includes a short period of relaxation at the end of the class. Generally, students progress at their own rate with support from the tutor. With regular practice the benefits of Iyengar Yoga to body and mind are many, including increased suppleness, strength and stamina as well as improved concentration and general well-being. Who is this course for?

This course is for adults aged 18+. It is suitable for beginners with no previous experience and those wishing to deepen their practice.

If you suffer from a medical condition we recommend that you take advice from your doctor before doing this type of physical exercise. All students should inform the tutor of any ongoing health problems. Do you need to bring anything? You must bring your own non-stick yoga mat and a cotton yoga blanket. Please wear comfortable clothing that allows free movement. Other props such as yoga blocks and belts are provided. Are there any additional costs? A non-stick yoga mat (approx. £17) and a cotton yoga blanket (approx. £20) must be provided at your own expense. You may wish to purchase additional props to aid your practice at home. Please contact us for more info. Who teaches this course? Hannah Cliff

Mon 25 Apr
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Mon 2 May
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Mon 9 May
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Mon 16 May
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Mon 23 May
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Mon 6 Jun
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Mon 13 Jun
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Mon 20 Jun
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Mon 27 Jun
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Mon 4 Jul
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Mon 11 Jul
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Mon 18 Jul
Randle Studio

£117 (£106)

Jabala & The Jinn

“I want to share my culture and experiences. We don’t see much theatre about British Muslims, particularly for this age group (5-12 years). Children who are experiencing theatre for the first time. Seeing something that they can relate to will bring them back to the theatre again. It’s so important to see yourself represented. I know growing up I didn’t have that and we underestimate how important that is to children“ Asif Khan – Writer STORY SYNOPSIS: We’re in Bradford. It’s been a few months since Jabala’s beloved Mum died. Dad is a brilliant father, but it’s an effort to get to school on time every day. One morning, when she says goodbye to her house as usual, Jabala hears a voice replying to her in Arabic. But no one’s there. Could it be Mum? Has she imagined it? With the help of a ‘Refugee Boy’ at school, a Shakespeare enthusiast called Munir, she summons… a Jinn. But this is no ordinary Jinn, as told in grandma’s stories and Jabala is in for a surprise. As the day of Eid approaches, events take a drastic turn and Jabala is forced to make some difficult decisions. Will things come together in time for the celebration? “This production had me hooked from the get-go. I loved it.” Beyond The Curtain “Bursting with energy…fresh and fast-moving” British Theatre Guide “Fun, charming and thoughtful” BrumHour

Produced by AIK Productions and Turtle Key Arts, in association with Kala Sangam and Belgrade Theatre Coventry supported by Stratford Circus and The AMAL Foundation. Illustration by Nadine Kaadan.

Sat 26 Feb
Theatre

£8–£12.50

Sun 27 Feb
Theatre

£8–£12.50

Jewellery for Beginners (JE106 Spring)

Learn how to design and make your own metal jewellery in this special course designed just for beginners.

What will you learn on this course This course is for those interested in learning how to create beautiful metal jewellery. Throughout this short course you will be introduced to core tools and traditional jewellery making techniques of

• Piece sawing (cutting metals) • Fold forming • Soldering • Basic Texturing Techniques • Enamelling • Polishing and Finish

The course will focus on a project, making a pendant, and as your skills develop and grow you will be encouraged to design and make your own ring or bangle. On completing the course, you will have gained confidence in basic bench skills, developed your fine motor skills and hand eye coordination, and have several pieces of jewellery you have designed and made to wear or give to friends and family.

This is a shorter course for those who want to try out the art of making jewellery. MAC’s purpose-built jewellery studio is a friendly place where you will meet other likeminded people and share your creative journey

Who is this course for? This is a beginner level course suitable for adults aged 18+. You do not need any previous experience and you will have full support from our professional artist tutor. The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dex-terity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a com-plimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair acces-sible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor. MAC will provide equipment for participants. You will need to purchase materials for the jewellery you wish to make as below.
Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from MAC individually or in packs e.g. Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades), Silver - £1.30 per gram, 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10 , Saw blades (x12) - £2.60, Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet Who teaches this course Chloe Minihane Slater

Sun 13 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£88 (£81)

Sun 20 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£88 (£81)

Sun 6 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£88 (£81)

Sun 13 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£88 (£81)

Sun 20 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£88 (£81)

Sun 27 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£88 (£81)

Sun 3 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£88 (£81)

Jewellery for Beginners (JE106 Summer)

Learn how to design and make your own metal jewellery in this special course designed just for beginners.

What will you learn on this course This course is for those interested in learning how to create beautiful metal jewellery. Throughout this short course you will be introduced to core tools and traditional jewellery making techniques of

• Piece sawing (cutting metals) • Fold forming • Soldering • Basic Texturing Techniques • Enamelling • Polishing and Finish

The course will focus on a project, making a pendant, and as your skills develop and grow you will be encouraged to design and make your own ring or bangle. On completing the course, you will have gained confidence in basic bench skills, developed your fine motor skills and hand eye coordination, and have several pieces of jewellery you have designed and made to wear or give to friends and family.

This is a shorter course for those who want to try out the art of making jewellery. MAC’s purpose-built jewellery studio is a friendly place where you will meet other likeminded people and share your creative journey

Who is this course for? This is a beginner level course suitable for adults aged 18+. You do not need any previous experience and you will have full support from our professional artist tutor. The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dex-terity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a com-plimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair acces-sible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor. MAC will provide equipment for participants. You will need to purchase materials for the jewellery you wish to make as below.
Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from MAC individually or in packs e.g. Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades), Silver - £1.30 per gram, 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10 , Saw blades (x12) - £2.60, Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet Who teaches this course Chloe Minihane Slater

Sun 15 May
Jewellery Studio

£88 (£81)

Sun 22 May
Jewellery Studio

£88 (£81)

Sun 29 May
Jewellery Studio

£88 (£81)

Sun 12 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£88 (£81)

Sun 19 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£88 (£81)

Sun 26 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£88 (£81)

Jewellery for Beginners (JE107 Spring)

Learn how to design and make your own metal jewellery in this special course designed just for beginners.

What will you learn on this course This course is for those interested in learning how to create beautiful metal jewellery. Throughout this short course you will be introduced to core tools and traditional jewellery making techniques of

• Piece sawing (cutting metals) • Fold forming • Soldering • Basic Texturing Techniques • Enamelling • Polishing and Finish

The course will focus on a project, making a pendant, and as your skills develop and grow you will be encouraged to design and make your own ring or bangle. On completing the course, you will have gained confidence in basic bench skills, developed your fine motor skills and hand eye coordination, and have several pieces of jewellery you have designed and made to wear or give to friends and family.

This is a shorter course for those who want to try out the art of making jewellery. MAC’s purpose-built jewellery studio is a friendly place where you will meet other likeminded people and share your creative journey

Who is this course for? This is a beginner level course suitable for adults aged 18+. You do not need any previous experience and you will have full support from our professional artist tutor. The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dex-terity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a com-plimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair acces-sible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor. MAC will provide equipment for participants. You will need to purchase materials for the jewellery you wish to make as below.
Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from MAC individually or in packs e.g. Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades), Silver - £1.30 per gram, 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10 , Saw blades (x12) - £2.60, Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet Who teaches this course Chloe Minihane Slater

Sun 13 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£88 (£81)

Sun 20 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£88 (£81)

Sun 6 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£88 (£81)

Sun 13 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£88 (£81)

Sun 20 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£88 (£81)

Sun 27 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£88 (£81)

Sun 3 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£88 (£81)

Jewellery for Beginners (JE107 Summer)

Learn how to design and make your own metal jewellery in this special course designed just for beginners.

What will you learn on this course This course is for those interested in learning how to create beautiful metal jewellery. Throughout this short course you will be introduced to core tools and traditional jewellery making techniques of

• Piece sawing (cutting metals) • Fold forming • Soldering • Basic Texturing Techniques • Enamelling • Polishing and Finish

The course will focus on a project, making a pendant, and as your skills develop and grow you will be encouraged to design and make your own ring or bangle. On completing the course, you will have gained confidence in basic bench skills, developed your fine motor skills and hand eye coordination, and have several pieces of jewellery you have designed and made to wear or give to friends and family.

This is a shorter course for those who want to try out the art of making jewellery. MAC’s purpose-built jewellery studio is a friendly place where you will meet other likeminded people and share your creative journey

Who is this course for? This is a beginner level course suitable for adults aged 18+. You do not need any previous experience and you will have full support from our professional artist tutor. The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dex-terity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a com-plimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair acces-sible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor. MAC will provide equipment for participants. You will need to purchase materials for the jewellery you wish to make as below.
Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from MAC individually or in packs e.g. Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades), Silver - £1.30 per gram, 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10 , Saw blades (x12) - £2.60, Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet Who teaches this course Chloe Minihane Slater

Sun 15 May
Jewellery Studio

£88 (£81)

Sun 22 May
Jewellery Studio

£88 (£81)

Sun 29 May
Jewellery Studio

£88 (£81)

Sun 12 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£88 (£81)

Sun 19 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£88 (£81)

Sun 26 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£88 (£81)

Jewellery Inspired by Nature (JE102 Spring)

Design and make your own nature themed jewellery in this course. Learn how to cut, heat, pattern, solder and polish metal to create unique pieces of jewellery inspired by nature. What will you learn on this course? During this course you will learn how to make your own nature inspired jewellery under the instruction of a skilled tutor. You will be introduced to a range of traditional jewellery making skills and techniques that may include: • saw piercing • filing • annealing • soldering • polishing • texturing You will then learn how to develop a design from paper to practice creating your jewellery based on your nature themed design. Our fully equipped studio has workbenches, soldering hearth, pickle bath, rolling mill, pendant motors and a variety of hand tools including piercing saws, files, hammers and punches which the tutor will teach you to use safely and correctly. On completing the course, you will have gained confidence in basic bench skills, developed your fine motor skills and hand eye coordination, and have jewellery you have designed and made yourself, either to wear or to give to friends and family. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. It is open to beginners and improvers. You do not need to have any jewellery making experience to attend this course as full instruction is given. If you have some previous experience and would like to develop your skills, learn some new techniques and work on your own designs with the tutor’s support and guidance. The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dexterity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair accessible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs Do you need to bring anything? Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor. You will need to purchase materials for the jewellery you wish to make as below. MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from MAC individually or in packs e.g. Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades) Silver - £1.30 per gram 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10 Saw blades (x12) - £2.60 Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet Who teaches this course? Vanessa Miller

Fri 14 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Fri 21 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Fri 28 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Fri 4 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Fri 11 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Fri 18 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Fri 4 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Fri 11 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Fri 18 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Fri 25 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Fri 1 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Fri 8 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Jewellery Inspired by Nature (JE102 Summer)

Design and make your own nature themed jewellery in this course. Learn how to cut, heat, pattern, solder and polish metal to create unique pieces of jewellery inspired by nature. What will you learn on this course? During this course you will learn how to make your own nature inspired jewellery under the instruction of a skilled tutor. You will be introduced to a range of traditional jewellery making skills and techniques that may include: • saw piercing • filing • annealing • soldering • polishing • texturing You will then learn how to develop a design from paper to practice creating your jewellery based on your nature themed design. Our fully equipped studio has workbenches, soldering hearth, pickle bath, rolling mill, pendant motors and a variety of hand tools including piercing saws, files, hammers and punches which the tutor will teach you to use safely and correctly. On completing the course, you will have gained confidence in basic bench skills, developed your fine motor skills and hand eye coordination, and have jewellery you have designed and made yourself, either to wear or to give to friends and family. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. It is open to beginners and improvers. You do not need to have any jewellery making experience to attend this course as full instruction is given. If you have some previous experience and would like to develop your skills, learn some new techniques and work on your own designs with the tutor’s support and guidance. The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dexterity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair accessible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs Do you need to bring anything? Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor. You will need to purchase materials for the jewellery you wish to make as below. MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from MAC individually or in packs e.g. Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades) Silver - £1.30 per gram 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10 Saw blades (x12) - £2.60 Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet Who teaches this course? Vanessa Miller

Fri 29 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Fri 6 May
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Fri 13 May
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Fri 20 May
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Fri 27 May
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Fri 10 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Fri 17 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Fri 24 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Fri 1 Jul
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Fri 8 Jul
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Fri 15 Jul
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Fri 22 Jul
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Jewellery Making for Beginners (JE01 Spring)

Learn basic techniques, including soldering, saw piercing and filing and make jewellery from your own designs.

What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn the skills necessary to design and make your own unique pieces of jewellery. The materials used are copper, brass, gilding metal and sterling silver. You will be taught a range of traditional jewellery making skills and techniques including: • Sawing and cutting out metals • soldering to join metals • polishing and buffing • forming • casting techniques • vitreous enamelling • finishing processes These techniques will be taught through a series of exercises such as: • Making a simple ring to a set design • Making a pendant to your own design • Making and enamelling a piece of jewellery to your own design The first exercise will be intensively supported but as you gain skills and confidence you will be supported to develop your own designs and encouraged to work independently.
MAC’s fully equipped studio has work benches, a soldering hearth and torch, enamelling kiln, polishing motor and various hand tools which the tutor will teach you to use safely and correctly. On completing the course you will have gained confidence in basic bench skills, developed your fine motor skills and hand eye coordination, and have several pieces of jewellery you have designed and made to wear or give to friends and family.

Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. This is a beginners course so you do not need to have any jewellery making experience to attend this course. If you have some previous experience such as making beaded jewellery or some other basic procedures and would like to develop your skills further, learn some new techniques with the tutor’s support and guidance, you are welcome to attend this course. The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dexterity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair accessible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor. You will need to purchase materials for the jewellery you wish to make as below. MAC will provide equipment to participants attending this course, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission.

Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from MAC individually or in packs e.g. Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades) Silver - £1.30 per gram 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10  Saw blades (x12) - £2.60 Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet

Who teaches this course? Vanessa Miller

Mon 10 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Mon 17 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Mon 24 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Mon 31 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Mon 7 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Mon 14 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Mon 28 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Mon 7 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Mon 14 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Mon 21 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Mon 28 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Mon 4 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Jewellery Making for Beginners (JE01 Summer)

Learn basic techniques, including soldering, saw piercing and filing and make jewellery from your own designs.

What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn the skills necessary to design and make your own unique pieces of jewellery. The materials used are copper, brass, gilding metal and sterling silver. You will be taught a range of traditional jewellery making skills and techniques including: • Sawing and cutting out metals • soldering to join metals • polishing and buffing • forming • casting techniques • vitreous enamelling • finishing processes These techniques will be taught through a series of exercises such as: • Making a simple ring to a set design • Making a pendant to your own design • Making and enamelling a piece of jewellery to your own design The first exercise will be intensively supported but as you gain skills and confidence you will be supported to develop your own designs and encouraged to work independently.
MAC’s fully equipped studio has work benches, a soldering hearth and torch, enamelling kiln, polishing motor and various hand tools which the tutor will teach you to use safely and correctly. On completing the course you will have gained confidence in basic bench skills, developed your fine motor skills and hand eye coordination, and have several pieces of jewellery you have designed and made to wear or give to friends and family.

Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. This is a beginners course so you do not need to have any jewellery making experience to attend this course. If you have some previous experience such as making beaded jewellery or some other basic procedures and would like to develop your skills further, learn some new techniques with the tutor’s support and guidance, you are welcome to attend this course. The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dexterity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair accessible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor. You will need to purchase materials for the jewellery you wish to make as below. MAC will provide equipment to participants attending this course, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission.

Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from MAC individually or in packs e.g. Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades) Silver - £1.30 per gram 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10  Saw blades (x12) - £2.60 Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet

Who teaches this course? Vanessa Miller

Mon 25 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Mon 2 May
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Mon 9 May
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Mon 16 May
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Mon 23 May
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Mon 6 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Mon 13 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Mon 20 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Mon 27 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Mon 4 Jul
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Mon 11 Jul
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Mon 18 Jul
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Jewellery Making for Improvers (JE101 Spring)

Learn jewellery making skills and techniques including sawing, forming, soldering and enameling and create and develop your own designs. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn how to design and make your own unique pieces of jewellery in copper and sterling silver. You will be taught a range of traditional jewellery making skills and techniques including: saw piercing filing soldering polishing texturing forming Enamelling Our fully equipped studio has work benches, a soldering hearth and torch, enamelling kiln, polishing motor and various hand tools which the tutor will teach you to use safely and correctly. All beginners start by making a ring, bangle and pendant. Students will then have the opportunity to develop their own designs. Improvers can work on their own designs with guidance and support as required. On completing the course you will have gained confidence in basic bench skills and have several pieces you have designed and made to wear or give to friends and family. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. It is open to students with some previous experience who would like to develop skills, learn some new techniques and work on their own designs with the tutor’s support and guidance. The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dexterity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair accessible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor. You will need to purchase materials for the jewellery you wish to make as below.

MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from MAC individually or in packs e.g. There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from MAC individually or in packs e.g. Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades) Silver - £1.30 per gram 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10 Saw blades (x12) - £2.60 Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet Who teaches this course? Vanessa Miller

Thu 13 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Thu 20 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Thu 27 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Thu 3 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Thu 10 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Thu 17 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Thu 3 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Thu 10 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Thu 17 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Thu 24 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Thu 31 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Thu 7 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Jewellery Making for Improvers (JE101 Summer)

Learn jewellery making skills and techniques including sawing, forming, soldering and enameling and create and develop your own designs. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn how to design and make your own unique pieces of jewellery in copper and sterling silver. You will be taught a range of traditional jewellery making skills and techniques including: saw piercing filing soldering polishing texturing forming Enamelling Our fully equipped studio has work benches, a soldering hearth and torch, enamelling kiln, polishing motor and various hand tools which the tutor will teach you to use safely and correctly. All beginners start by making a ring, bangle and pendant. Students will then have the opportunity to develop their own designs. Improvers can work on their own designs with guidance and support as required. On completing the course you will have gained confidence in basic bench skills and have several pieces you have designed and made to wear or give to friends and family. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. It is open to students with some previous experience who would like to develop skills, learn some new techniques and work on their own designs with the tutor’s support and guidance. The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dexterity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair accessible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor. You will need to purchase materials for the jewellery you wish to make as below.

MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from MAC individually or in packs e.g. There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from MAC individually or in packs e.g. Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades) Silver - £1.30 per gram 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10 Saw blades (x12) - £2.60 Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet Who teaches this course? Vanessa Miller

Thu 28 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Thu 5 May
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Thu 12 May
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Thu 19 May
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Thu 26 May
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Thu 9 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Thu 16 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Thu 23 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Thu 30 Jun
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Thu 7 Jul
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Thu 14 Jul
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Thu 21 Jul
Jewellery Studio

£168 (£152)

Jewellery Making for Improvers (JE89 Spring)

Learn jewellery making skills and techniques including sawing, forming, soldering and enameling and create and develop your own designs. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn how to design and make your own unique pieces of jewellery in copper and sterling silver. You will be taught a range of traditional jewellery making skills and techniques including: saw piercing filing soldering polishing texturing forming Enamelling Our fully equipped studio has work benches, a soldering hearth and torch, enamelling kiln, polishing motor and various hand tools which the tutor will teach you to use safely and correctly. All beginners start by making a ring, bangle and pendant. Students will then have the opportunity to develop their own designs. Improvers can work on their own designs with guidance and support as required. On completing the course you will have gained confidence in basic bench skills and have several pieces you have designed and made to wear or give to friends and family. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. It is open to students with some previous experience who would like to develop skills, learn some new techniques and work on their own designs with the tutor’s support and guidance. The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dexterity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair accessible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs. Do you need to bring anything? Students are required to wear flat closed-toe shoes, preferably trainers or boots, as this is a workshop environment with heavy tools, soldering equipment and a kiln. Unsuitable footwear may result in the student not being able to take part in the session. Long hair must be tied back. The use of protective equipment will be provided with the guidance of the Artist Tutor. You will need to purchase materials for the jewellery you wish to make as below.

MAC can provide basic equipment to participants attending this course if needed, although attendees are encouraged to bring their own where possible to minimise the risk of COVID-19 transmission. Are there any additional costs? There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from MAC individually or in packs e.g. There are additional costs for materials such as base metals, sterling silver, solder, saw blades and findings. These can be purchased from MAC individually or in packs e.g. Jewellery Starter Pack - £8.50 (2x copper sheets, 2x brass sheets, 2x wet & dry paper, 2M copper wire, 12x saw blades) Silver - £1.30 per gram 0.9mm Copper Sheet 6”x3” - £2.10 Saw blades (x12) - £2.60 Wet & Dry Paper - £1.10 per sheet Who teaches this course? Vanessa Miller

Thu 13 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Thu 20 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Thu 27 Jan
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Thu 3 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Thu 10 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Thu 17 Feb
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Thu 3 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Thu 10 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Thu 17 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Thu 24 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Thu 31 Mar
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Thu 7 Apr
Jewellery Studio

£178 (£162)

Jewellery Making for Improvers (JE89 Summer)

Learn jewellery making skills and techniques including sawing, forming, soldering and enameling and create and develop your own designs. What will you learn on this course? On this course you will learn how to design and make your own unique pieces of jewellery in copper and sterling silver. You will be taught a range of traditional jewellery making skills and techniques including: saw piercing filing soldering polishing texturing forming Enamelling Our fully equipped studio has work benches, a soldering hearth and torch, enamelling kiln, polishing motor and various hand tools which the tutor will teach you to use safely and correctly. All beginners start by making a ring, bangle and pendant. Students will then have the opportunity to develop their own designs. Improvers can work on their own designs with guidance and support as required. On completing the course you will have gained confidence in basic bench skills and have several pieces you have designed and made to wear or give to friends and family. Who is this course for? This course is suitable for adults aged 18+. It is open to students with some previous experience who would like to develop skills, learn some new techniques and work on their own designs with the tutor’s support and guidance. The course is accessible for adults of all abilities but requires a high level of manual dexterity and tool handling. A support worker or carer may assist. Carers must book a complimentary ticket if attending a course to provide support. The studio is wheelchair accessible. Please enquire to discuss your specific needs